TW458924B - Packaging machine - Google Patents

Packaging machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW458924B
TW458924B TW89107846A TW89107846A TW458924B TW 458924 B TW458924 B TW 458924B TW 89107846 A TW89107846 A TW 89107846A TW 89107846 A TW89107846 A TW 89107846A TW 458924 B TW458924 B TW 458924B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
carriage
carriages
track
sealing
fabric
Prior art date
Application number
TW89107846A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Mark S Ortiz
Emil D Bogdanov
Mohammad R Naji
Keith G Jacobs
Randal T Byrum
Original Assignee
Int Paper Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Int Paper Co filed Critical Int Paper Co
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW458924B publication Critical patent/TW458924B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Auxiliary Devices For And Details Of Packaging Control (AREA)
  • Containers And Plastic Fillers For Packaging (AREA)
  • General Induction Heating (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to a device (10) and method for performing a packaging operation on an article. The device (10) is a packaging machine that includes a first track (58), a second track (60) provided in close proximity to the first track (58), at least one first and second carriage (52, 53) associated with a respective track, a drive system, and a control system (326). The drive system includes a plurality of active elements (Coil 1 ... Coil n) associated with each track and a reactive element (174) associated with each carriage (52, 53). The active elements (Coil 1 ... Coil n) are independently activated to produce and control relative movement between the first and second carriages (52, 53) around their respective tracks (58, 60). The control system (326) controls the activation of the active elements in order to provide independent control of motion parameters for the carriages (52, 53). A first and a second tool (70, 71) are associated with the first and second carriages (52, 53), respectively, for performing at least part of the packaging operation. The method includes mounting a plurality of carriages (52, 53) around tracks (58, 60), with each carriage having a tool (70, 71), and controlling the movement of the carriages around the track so that the manufacturing operation can at least partially be conducted. The carriages are driven around the tracks by linear motors.

Description

A7 4589^4 _____B7 五、發明說明0 ) 相關申請之交叉參照 本申請案係申請1999年4月26曰申請之美國臨時專利 60/131,027 號;1999年6月 3 日中請之 60/137,3 46號;1 9 9 9 年 7月1 7日申請之60/144,483號;及各於2000年2月25日申請 之60/185,019、60/185,020、60/185,065 號之優點。 發明範圍 本發明概有關包裝機,尤其,本發明針對實施包裝機的 一或多個選定元件之受控制動作,以連續形成產品之各別 包裝。 頁 發明背景 許多產業(尤其食品業)已經採用在各容器中爲了不同目 的包裝產品。理想情形中,產品各別包裝之生產成本保持 在可能的最低値,對於消費者不會顯著增加已包裝產品的 最終成本d 許多產品中,一般重要且時常重要的情形爲:各別包裝 中提供的產品容積或品質在每個包裝都很均勻,此需求可 減缓生產速率。習知技藝包裝機相關之其他限制因素有關 :對於一或多個元件或包裝機的移動功能與其控制之固有 缺陷’這些缺陷可包括:控制開始及停止動作、加速度率 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 、及制動及相配合元件的動作範園中之累積不糈確之類的 困難。 ^ 、 包裝業中不斷努力以低成本提供有效包裝,在此努力方 式中已有多種企圖増加既有包裝機的製造速率,此等増加 常包含努力加強包裝機之各種元件的移動速度,以消除包 -4 _A7 4589 ^ 4 _____B7 V. Description of the invention 0) Cross-reference to related applications This application is filed in US Provisional Patent No. 60 / 131,027 filed on April 26, 1999; 60 / 137,3 46; 60 / 144,483 filed on July 17, 1999; and 60 / 185,019, 60 / 185,020, 60 / 185,065 filed on February 25, 2000. Scope of the invention The present invention relates generally to packaging machines. In particular, the present invention is directed to implementing controlled actions of one or more selected components of a packaging machine to continuously form individual packages of a product. Page Background of the Invention Many industries, especially the food industry, have adopted packaging products in containers for different purposes. Ideally, the production cost of the individual packaging of the product is kept to the lowest possible level, and it will not significantly increase the final cost of the packaged product for consumers. D In many products, generally important and often important situations are: The volume or quality of the product is uniform in each package, and this demand can slow down the production rate. Other limiting factors related to the conventional art packaging machine are related to the inherent defects of the movement function of one or more components or packaging machines and their control. These defects may include: control start and stop actions, acceleration rate, consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Difficulties such as the printing of cooperatives, and the accumulation of brakes and cooperating components in the action domain are uncertain. ^ In the packaging industry, there are continuous efforts to provide effective packaging at low cost. In this effort, there have been various attempts to increase the manufacturing speed of existing packaging machines. These additions often include efforts to strengthen the speed of movement of various components of the packaging machine in order to eliminate Pack-4 _

本紙張尺度適財關家標準(CNS)^規格⑵㈣97公楚) 4 5 Β· 9 2,4 Α7 _ Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(2 ) 裝機及其他性能參數的變化。迄今,許多此種努力已受限 於包裝機各種元件的機械移動,譬如,本技藝目前習知重 覆密封作業中,其密封爪接合一移動管而沿管段以重覆相 隔距離進行橫向密封該管,密封爪的循環之操作速度受限 於密封爪的循環機構可允許的加速度。 包裝業中曰益常用稱爲成型、充填及密封(FFS)機之一型 包裝機,採用這些機器將一平坦織物以半連續方式轉換成 —充填的管、然後成爲各別包裝(其各包含一產品)。常用 此機器在紙板、疊層織物形成的各別包裝中包裝液體產品 ’這些機器亦常在其長度的橫向中採用包裝材料的熱密封 。尚未有已知FFS機採用包裝材料織物通過機器之連續往前 速度。 習知的成型、充填及密封機在利用織物往前移動而同步 化形成各產品包裝方面並不順利。最常見情形爲:織物係 包括等於所形成包裝所需長度尺寸(或寬度尺寸)的間隔沿 織物長度重覆的圖樣、設計、及/或印刷物。包裝係時常包 括對齊標記,其顯示一新產品包裝的端點及/或起點,移動 織物之連續橫向密封彼此成爲精確距離。各橫向密封亦製 造在織物上的一預選定位置處,如同使用移動織物上的對 齊標記之情形。習知技藝FFS包裝機中,橫向密封位置與對 齊標記之初步對齊常需要機器(因此包括多個已浪費產品) 的數次循環。在初步建立之後,橫向密封與其對齊標記在 織物上的對齊可能受此等因素(譬如機器元件的不當或無效 率操作、織物往前移動速度之不一致、及織物縱拉力之變 -5-This paper is suitable for financial and family care standards (CNS) ^ Specifications⑵㈣97g) 4 5 Β · 9 2,4 Α7 _ Β7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The change. To date, many of these efforts have been limited to the mechanical movement of the various components of the packaging machine. For example, in the current known repeated sealing operation, the sealing claw engages a moving tube and transversely seals along the tube section at overlapping intervals. The operating speed of the tube and seal claw circulation is limited by the allowable acceleration of the circulation claw of the seal claw. The packaging industry commonly refers to a type of packaging machine known as a forming, filling and sealing (FFS) machine, which uses these machines to convert a flat fabric in a semi-continuous manner into a -filled tube and then into individual packaging (each containing One product). Commonly this machine packs liquid products in separate packages formed of cardboard and laminated fabrics. These machines also often use heat sealing of the packaging material in the transverse direction of their length. There are no known FFS machines that use packaging material fabric to pass the machine at a continuous forward speed. The conventional forming, filling and sealing machines are not smooth in synchronizing the product packaging by moving the fabric forward. The most common scenario is a fabric that includes a pattern, design, and / or print that repeats along the length of the fabric at intervals equal to the required length (or width) of the resulting package. Packaging often includes alignment marks that indicate the end and / or starting point of a new product package, and the continuous transverse seals of the moving fabric are precisely spaced from each other. Each transverse seal is also made at a preselected position on the fabric, as is the case with alignment marks on a moving fabric. In the conventional art FFS packaging machine, the initial alignment of the transverse seal position and the alignment mark often requires several cycles of the machine (and therefore including multiple wasted products). After the initial establishment, the alignment of the transverse seal and its alignment mark on the fabric may be affected by these factors (such as improper or invalid operation of machine elements, inconsistent speed of the fabric's forward movement, and changes in the fabric's longitudinal tension -5-

請 先 閱 讀 背 之 注 項 再 頁 訂 線Please read the remarks on the back before setting the page.

CJ ά 2 4 A7 B7 五、發明說明(3 ) 化、及其他因素)不利地影響。横向密封與其在織物上的預 定對齊標記之未對齊將造成一完成包裝内含產品之不正確 容積。 已先藉由改變織物往前動作的速率及/或以機械方式變更 密封爪相對織物移動之動作型式,使爪在一不同位置接合 織物,來先達成對齊(亦即橫向密封位置沿織物配合至織物 的一印刷特徵)。織物的往前移動速率之變化可導致織物拉 力變動而負面影響各別成型包裝内所獲得之產品容積。機 器機構具有複雜的機械調整、且常以分離步驟完成。此習 知技藝機器中,可能需要五個或更多機器循環來矯正一對 齊偏移。若依步驟完成矯正,對齊系統係連續“搜尋”(譬如 在一方向中、然後在另一方向中過度矯正),此程序很費時 、大量耗費廢料、且不精確。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 習知包裝機進一步受到限制,其中包裝生產速率受限於 形成橫向密封所用的密封爪移動可允許之實際速度。尤其 ’本技藝中已知在其定位過程中沿一閉迴路路徑移動以形 成一密封之密封爪係受限於路徑回行部份之密封爪的加速 度率,其譬如受限於可爲FFS及類似包裝機的目前最快已知 生產速度之約125%範圍之一絕對最大速度。用以形成25〇 毫升容積的平行六面體容器(如矩形、箱形容器)之習知技 藝FFS機係以每小時少於9〇〇〇包裝之生產速率作業。 美國專利4,383,438號係某程度代表習知技藝的機械裝置 用途(如凸輪),用以將密封爪移動而接合一移動織物,故 使爪保持接合一段足以形成密封的時間,且随後自織物抽 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4現格(210 297公釐)CJ ά 2 4 A7 B7 V. Invention description (3) and other factors) adversely affect. Misalignment of the transverse seal with its predetermined alignment mark on the fabric will cause an incorrect volume of the product contained in the finished package. The alignment has first been achieved by changing the forward rate of the fabric and / or mechanically changing the movement pattern of the sealing claws relative to the fabric, so that the claws engage the fabric at different positions to achieve alignment (i.e., the transverse sealing position fits along the fabric to A printing feature of the fabric). Variations in the forward movement rate of the fabric can cause changes in fabric tension and negatively affect the volume of product obtained in the respective shaped package. The mechanism has complex mechanical adjustments and is often done in separate steps. In this artisanal machine, five or more machine cycles may be required to correct a pair of aligned offsets. If the correction is done step by step, the alignment system is continuously "searched" (for example, in one direction and then overcorrected in the other direction). This procedure is time consuming, wasteful, and inaccurate. Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Conventional packaging machines are further limited, in which the packaging production rate is limited by the actual speed allowed by the movement of the sealing claws used to form the transverse seal. In particular, it is known in the art that the sealing claws moving along a closed-loop path during the positioning process to form a seal are limited by the acceleration rate of the sealing claws in the return part of the path, which are limited, for example, by FFS and An absolute maximum speed in a range of about 125% of the currently fastest known production speeds for similar packaging machines. The conventional art FFS machine used to form a parallelepiped container (such as rectangular, box-shaped container) with a volume of 250 ml is operated at a production rate of less than 9,000 packages per hour. U.S. Patent No. 4,383,438 is a mechanical device (such as a cam) that represents a conventional technique to a certain extent, and is used to move the sealing claws to engage a moving fabric, so that the claws remain engaged for a period of time sufficient to form a seal, and then the -6-This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 297 mm)

五、發明說明(4 ) 出爪。此機械裝置係限於由凸輪輪廓固定的動作,並且 .對於已知的凸輪係固定爪的移動輪廓,因此,ρ Λ 1 u 些凸手 統中,除了較小調整之外’少有或沒有機會改變密封爪之 動作,爪的移動輪廓亦不能改變以容納不同包装特徵(如、 同的尺寸)。美國專利4,279,098號提出另一凸輪控制的系统 ,使密封爪在成型、充填及密封機中移動。 美國專利5,706,627號爲特定習知技藝試囷藉由提供機器 多數作業的電子控制而增加包裝機速度之相關複雜範例, 此專利案提出:包裝機各站由一或多伺服馬達所控制,造 成昴貴且浪費的系統。 許多包裝機中,视需要有時需相對於包裝材料通過包$ 機的移動在時間上產生一特定操作。譬如,形成及/或充填 三角頂型容器時,需可偵測部份成型的容器之出現,且需 發展指示在對其通過包裝機的移動之一預定位置出現(或未 出現)容器之一訊號,此訊號常爲電訊號且進给至—控制系 統,控制系統將此訊號(或未出現訊號)中繼至作業站(其中 在容器上進行部份成型作業)。特定情形中,偵測到供至操 作站且在操作站上作用之訊號糈確度對於容器的順利成型 係很重要。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 其他專利案及公告亦描述各種型態之包裝機,發證予司 戴克等人之美國專利RE33,407號揭示一種用以密封多葉飾 (polyfoil)的方法及裝置,多數密封爪安裝在持續前進之連 續承載裝置上,使各密封爪可相對應地接觸一相對壓力爪 ,·以由感應來壓縮並密封多葉飾。 -7- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(5 ) 歐洲公告ΕΡ Ο 887 273號顯示一種連績生產可傾倒式食品 產品密封包裝之包裝機,數爪係沿一管相對側上的鏈相連 接以熱密封該管,一切割構件位於爪後方以沿密封區來切 割該管。 歐洲公告ΕΡ 0 887 264號揭示一種具第一及第二輸送鏈之 包裝單元,其中具有數爪及數個反爪以熱密封—管剖面。 輸送鏈亦有半殼元件以控制連接至各爪及反爪之包裝容積 、並配合一相對凸輪以控制半殼元件進出管的供應路徑之 相對移動。 歐/州公告ΕΡ 0 887 203號揭示一種具有附接至輪送鏈的爪 及反爪之包裝單元,爪及反爪係由具不同輪廓的一對凸輪 沿各別工作路徑受引導,以控制爪的相互作用。 感應密封爪亦爲習知技藝所熟悉,且已設有各種特徵。 發證予布隆維斯之美國專利5,649,4〇7號顯示一種密封表面 上具三個平行相隔導體之密封爪:一中央U型導體可容納 一刀,而兩管狀導體的構造可承載一冷卻劑。三個導體配 置在與一肥粒鐵材料核心相隔之一電絕緣載體層中。 發證予希爾默森等人之美國專利4,7〇4,5〇9號針對一種密 封爪,其具備一設有比核心其餘部份有更高滲透性的肥粒 鐵嵌件之U型肥粒鐵核心’ υ型核心在兩侧以一導體爲邊界 ,其中设有冷卻劑材料用之一中央路徑。 發證予波資納之美國專利4,371,768號針對一種具Ε型肥粒 鐵核心之游封爪,其具備捲在核心中央腳周園之—對捲繞 部,此參照係採用5 0 - 6 0千赫範園之低頻振盪。5. Description of the invention (4) Claw out. This mechanism is limited to the action fixed by the cam profile, and for the known contour of the cam system's fixed claws, therefore, ρ Λ 1 u in some convex hands, except for minor adjustments, there is little or no opportunity When the action of the sealing claw is changed, the moving contour of the claw cannot be changed to accommodate different packaging characteristics (eg, the same size). U.S. Patent No. 4,279,098 proposes another cam-controlled system that moves the sealing jaws in a forming, filling, and sealing machine. U.S. Patent No. 5,706,627 is a complex example related to increasing the speed of a packaging machine by providing electronic control of most operations of the machine. This patent proposes that each station of the packaging machine is controlled by one or more servo motors, resulting in: Expensive and wasteful system. In many packaging machines, it is sometimes necessary to produce a specific operation in time relative to the movement of the packaging material through the packaging machine. For example, when forming and / or filling a triangular top container, it is necessary to be able to detect the presence of a partially formed container, and it is necessary to develop an indication that one of the containers appears (or does not appear) at a predetermined position during its movement through the packaging machine. Signal, this signal is usually a telecommunication signal and fed to the control system. The control system relays this signal (or no signal appears) to the operating station (where part of the forming operation is performed on the container). In certain cases, the accuracy of the signal detected on the operating station and acting on it is important for the smooth forming of the container. Other patent cases and announcements printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs also describe various types of packaging machines, and issued a certificate to Steck et al. US Patent No. RE33,407 to disclose a polyfoil for sealing In the method and device, most of the sealing claws are installed on a continuous carrying device that continuously advances, so that each sealing claw can correspondingly contact a relative pressure claw, so as to compress and seal the multi-leaf ornament by induction. -7- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × χ297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of Invention (5) European Publication EP Ο 887 273 shows A packaging machine for continuous production of pourable food product sealed packaging. Several claws are connected along a chain on the opposite side of a tube to heat seal the tube. A cutting member is located behind the claw to cut the tube along the sealing area. European publication EP 0 887 264 discloses a packaging unit with a first and a second conveying chain, which has several claws and several anti-claws for heat-sealing-pipe section. The conveyor chain also has half-shell elements to control the packaging volume connected to each claw and counter-claw, and cooperates with a relative cam to control the relative movement of the supply path of the half-shell elements into and out of the pipe. European / State Announcement EP 0 887 203 discloses a packaging unit having claws and counter claws attached to a carousel chain. The claws and counter claws are guided by a pair of cams with different profiles along respective working paths to control Interaction of claws. Induction sealing claws are also familiar with conventional techniques and have been provided with various features. US Patent No. 5,649,407 issued to Blooms shows a sealing jaw with three parallel spaced conductors on the sealing surface: a central U-shaped conductor can accommodate one blade, and the structure of two tubular conductors can carry a cooling Agent. Three conductors are arranged in an electrically insulating carrier layer separated from a core of ferrous iron material. U.S. Patent No. 4,704,509 issued to Hilmerson et al. Is directed to a sealing jaw having a U-shaped ferrous iron insert with a higher permeability than the rest of the core Type-Ferrous-Iron Core 'The υ-type core is bordered by a conductor on both sides, and a central path for the coolant material is provided therein. U.S. Patent No. 4,371,768 issued to Boschner is directed to a free-seal claw with an E-shaped fat iron core, which is provided with a coiled part around the center of the core—the winding part. This reference system uses 5 0-6 0 Low-frequency oscillations of KHz Fanyuan.

<"8 —< " 8 —

A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(6 ) 發證予韓森等人之美國專利5,444,220號針對一種採用一 C 型核心之感應加熱器,C型核心的各腳設有一個包括鉸合 線(Litz wire)之捲繞部。 發證予韓森等人之美國專利5,313,037號針對一種採用一E 型肥粒鐵核心之感應加熱線圈,E型核心的中央腳設有一 個中央冷卻劑路徑,鉸合線捲在E型核心中央腳的周圍以 提供感應。 發明概要 本發明有關一種包裝機及包裝物件之方法,包裝機包括 一第一軌遒、安裝相對於第一執道作獨立移動之至少一第 —滑架、與第一軌道相關之多數主動元件、—控制系統、 與第一滑架相關之至少一.第一工具以進行至少部份包装作 業。各第一滑架包括一反應性元件且具有與其相關的至少 一動作參數,主動元件係與反應性元件相關,以在第一滑 架與第一轨道之間產生相對移動,各主動元件較佳獨立引 動以控制第—滑架與第一軌道之間的相對移動,控制系統 較佳控制主動元件的引動,以獨立控制各第一滑架的至少 一動作參數,主動元件係由控制系統作選擇性引動,以引 導第一滑架、及沿第一軌道的第一轨道進行至少部份包裝 作業。 包裝機亦可包括鄰近第一軌道設置之—第二轨道、至少 —第二滑架、與第二軌道相關之多數主動元件、與第二滑 架相關之至少一第二工具以進行至少部份包裝作業。安裝 第二滑架以相對第二軌道作獨立移動,各第二滑架包括一 -9- 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS〉A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐) --------------I--- \ (請先閱婧背面之注意事項再填f頁) 訂 --線- Λ Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(7 ) 反應性元件且具有與其相關的至少一動作參數,主動元件 係與滑架的反應性元件呈操作性相關,以分別在第一及第 二滑架之間及第一及第二軌道之間產生相對移動,控制系 統較佳係控制主動元件的引動,以獨立控制各第一及第二 滑架的至少一動作參數,主動元件係由控制系統作選擇性 引動,以沿其各別軌道來引導第一及第二滑架,第一及第 二滑架在進行至少部份包裝作業之軌道的一第一段處合併 ,且在第一及第二軌道的其他段處分離。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 主動元件較佳係爲與鄰近線圈呈電絕緣且沿第一及第二 路徑配置之導電線圈,各線圈在啓動時係建立反應性元件 與電磁場相關時可有效影響反應性元件之電磁場。控制系 統係以各第一及第二滑架沿第一及第二軌道的位置之一函 數,來控制各線圈的啓動,故獨立控制各第一及第二滑架 ,控制系統亦可控制第一及第二滑動的速度,使得材料織 物具有大致固定的速度。主動元件可安裝在軌遒上,且控 制系統可包括一多工器(multiplexer),控制系統的構造可改 變第一及第二滑架沿第一及第二轨道的獨立移動速度或速 率,以維持織物通過包裝機之一大致固定速度。在第一及 第二工具移動而接合材料織物時,控制系統的構造係減缓 第一及第二滑架沿第一及第二軌道的移動,且在完成移動 以與織物接合時係加速滑架的移動。 動作參數可爲:力、加速度、速度、方向、位置、扭矩 、或類似物中之一或多者。 •物件較佳以包裝機由一材料織物所形成,第一及第二工 -10- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(8 ) 具的構造係配合握持並拉取第一及第二軌遒之間的織物, 物件係爲填有食物的包裝,且第一及第二工具共同包含一 密封機構,以密封及切開已充填的物件。 第一軌道位置係鄰近第二軌道,使得第一及第二滑架可 在第一及第二軌道之間所界定區域中接觸,以共同進行至 少部份的包裝作業。第一及第二滑架亦可包括一第三工具 ’第三工具可控制物件容積,第一及第二工具係用以共同 密封及切開物件。 包裝機亦可包括一物件位置感測器,其構造及位置可偵 測物件位置,控制系統可與物件位置感測器及第一及第二 滑架呈操作性相關,以改變滑架沿軌道的移動速率,使得 各第一及第二工具在接合期間與物件各部份相對齊,主動 元件及反應性元件較佳爲一線性馬達之部份,且線性馬達 沿軌道驅動第一及第二滑架。 本發明的包裝機能夠以每小時約600至48,000物件的速率 來生產物件。 本發明包裝物件之方法包括:安裝多數第一滑架,以相 對於具一第一移動路徑之—第一轨道作獨立移動,使多數 主動元件與第一滑架的至少一反應性元件在第一執道上呈 操作性相關,以在第一滑架與第一軌道之間產生相對移動 ,使至少一第一工具與各第—滑架呈相關以進行至少部份 的一包裝作業,沿著與第一移動路徑相整合的一第三路徑 來定位一材料織物,並控制主動元件的啓動。第一滑架具 有至少一反應性元件而各主動元件獨立啓動以控制第一滑 -11 - 本紙張尺奴針闕家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公复)A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (6) US Patent No. 5,444,220 issued to Hansen et al. Is directed to an induction heater using a C-type core. There is a winding section including a Litz wire. U.S. Patent No. 5,313,037 issued to Hansen et al. Is directed to an induction heating coil using an E-type fat iron core. The central leg of the E-type core is provided with a central coolant path, and the hinge wire is wound in the center of the E-type core. Around the feet to provide induction. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a packaging machine and a method for packaging articles. The packaging machine includes a first rail, at least one first-carriage mounted independently of the first track, and most active components associated with the first track. --- control system, at least one. First tool related to the first carriage to perform at least part of the packaging operation. Each first carriage includes a reactive element and has at least one action parameter associated therewith. The active element is related to the reactive element to generate relative movement between the first carriage and the first track. Each active element is preferably Independent actuation to control the relative movement between the first carriage and the first track. The control system preferably controls the actuation of the active components to independently control at least one action parameter of each first carriage. The active components are selected by the control system. It can be induced by a guide to guide the first carriage and at least part of the packaging operation along the first track along the first track. The packaging machine may also include a second track, at least a second carriage disposed adjacent to the first track, most active components associated with the second track, and at least a second tool associated with the second carriage for at least a portion Packaging operations. Install the second carriage to move independently with respect to the second track. Each second carriage includes a -9- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS> A4 specification (21〇χ 297 mm) ----- --------- I --- \ (please read the notes on the back of Jing first and then fill in page f) Order--line-Λ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (7) Reactive element and related to it At least one motion parameter of the active component is operatively related to the reactive components of the carriage to generate relative movement between the first and second carriages and between the first and second tracks, respectively. The control system is better It controls the activation of the active element to independently control at least one action parameter of each of the first and second carriages. The active element is selectively actuated by the control system to guide the first and second carriages along their respective tracks. The first and second carriages are merged at a first section of the track where at least part of the packaging operation is performed, and separated at other sections of the first and second track. Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The element is preferably electrically insulated from adjacent coils and follows first and second paths Equipped with conductive coils, each coil establishes a reactive element that can effectively affect the electromagnetic field of the reactive element when it is started. The control system is based on the positions of the first and second carriages along the first and second tracks. A function to control the start of each coil, so the first and second carriages are controlled independently. The control system can also control the speed of the first and second sliding, so that the material fabric has a substantially fixed speed. The active component can be installed on On the ballast, and the control system may include a multiplexer, the structure of the control system can change the independent moving speed or speed of the first and second carriages along the first and second tracks to maintain the fabric through the packaging machine One is approximately a fixed speed. When the first and second tools move to join the material fabric, the control system is structured to slow down the movement of the first and second carriages along the first and second tracks, and after the movement is completed to When the fabric is joined, it accelerates the movement of the carriage. The action parameters can be: one or more of force, acceleration, speed, direction, position, torque, or the like. • Object Jiayi packaging machine is made of a material fabric, the first and the second process-10- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (8) The structure of the tool is used to hold and pull the fabric between the first and second rails. The object is a package filled with food, and the first and second tools together include a seal. Mechanism to seal and cut the filled objects. The first track position is adjacent to the second track, so that the first and second carriages can contact in the area defined between the first and second tracks to jointly perform at least part The first and second carriages can also include a third tool. The third tool can control the volume of the object, and the first and second tools are used to seal and cut the object together. The packaging machine can also include an object position sensor, whose structure and position can detect the position of the object, and the control system can be operatively related to the object position sensor and the first and second carriages to change the carriage along the track The moving speed makes the first and second tools aligned with each part of the object during the joining. The active element and the reactive element are preferably part of a linear motor, and the linear motor drives the first and second parts along the track. Carriage. The packaging machine of the present invention is capable of producing articles at a rate of about 600 to 48,000 articles per hour. The method for packaging articles of the present invention includes: installing a plurality of first carriages to move independently with respect to a first track having a first movement path, so that most active elements and at least one reactive element of the first carriage An operating path is operatively related to generate relative movement between the first carriage and the first track, so that at least one first tool is associated with each of the first carriages to perform at least a part of a packaging operation. A third path integrated with the first moving path locates a material fabric and controls the activation of the active element. The first carriage has at least one reactive element and each active element is activated independently to control the first slide.

458924、發明說明(9 五 A7 B7 架與第一軌道之間的相對 篥 ~ ^ ^ 1# ^移動。主動元件受到控制以沿第 軌道來引導昂一滑架 目 'Λ m ^ 故可在材料織物上利用第一工… «第二路徑至少部份進行包裝作業。 法亦可包括安装多數第二滑架’以相對於具一第 :移動路#之—第二軌道作獨立移動,使多數主動元件與 ::!!架的至少一反應性元件呈操作性相關’以在第二滑 ,、罘二軌道之間產生相對移冑,使至少一第二工具與各 弟,滑架呈相關以進行至少部份的—包裝作業,及控制主 動兀件的啓動。第二滑架已與至少一反應性元件相關,而 各主動元件受獨立啓動以控制第二滑架與第二軌道之間的 ,對移動。王動元件受到控制以沿其各軌道來引導第一及 第一滑架,故可在材料織物上利用第一及第二工具至少部 份進行包裝作業。 該方法亦可包括:沿第一及第二路徑以聯合方式移動第 —及第二滑架,第一及第二工具相配合以進行包裝作業, 包裝作業可包括以第一工具的密封器來密封一部份材料織 物’包裝作業亦可包括:在第一及第二滑架之間,用第一 及第二工具以一大致固定速度來握持及拉取材料織物。 該方法亦可包括:偵測一部份材料織物相對於第一及第 二滑架位置之位置,及定位第一及第二滑架以與材料織物 上的一對齊標記相對準,以產生大致均勻尺寸的物件。 _圖式簡單説明 本發明較佳特徵揭示於圖中,其中類似編號在各圖代表 類似的元件,其中: -12 本紙張尺度適用十國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2J0 X 297公釐) --------------戈— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填t本頁) 訂_ - 線. 經濟部智慈財產局員工消費合作杜印製 -458924 五、發明說明(10 ) 圖1爲實施本發明各種特徵的成型、充填及密封包装機之 一實施例的示意圖; 圖2爲描述本發明的各種特徵之一熱密封次總成之立體圖; 圖3爲圖2所示次總成之平面圖; 圖4爲圖3所示次總成之右侧的侧視圖; 圖5爲圖1的熱密封總成之立體圖,其中描述—次總成的 密封爪與另一次總成的密封爪相對齊; 圖6爲描述每次總成採用三個滑架之兩熱密封次總成之平 面圖; 圖7爲圖2及3所示次總成的俯視圖; 圖8爲本發明的一實施例用之一滑架位於未接合位置之立 體圖; 圖8 A爲圖8的滑架位於接合位置之立體圖; 圖8B爲根據本發明之刀的第一實施例之立體圖; 圖8 C爲其侧视圖; 圖8 D爲其切割邊綠的細節圖; 圖8E-H爲根據本發明構成之刀的其他實施例之平面圖; 圖9爲描述密封爪相對齊之一對滑架之俯視圖; 圖9A爲根據本發明構成的滑架之另一實施例之立體圖; 圖1 〇爲特別描述線圈與滑架之關係以實施本發明各種特 徵的系統之一實施例的示意圖; 圖11A爲本發明所用之一閉迴路控制系統之實施例的示意 圖; •圖11B爲圖11A的軌道沿線A-A所取之剖視圖; -13- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) I ^1 ^1 1· ϋ «I I ϋ I:-: (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填t本頁) 上a· •線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ''r 4 58 9 24 A7 — B7 五、發明說明(11 ) 圖1 2爲本發明滑架之一控制系統的實施例用之—感測器 .陣列及相配合的磁鐵圖; 圖1 3爲本發明之控制系統的—實施例用之磁性元件之實 施例的示意圖; 圖14爲本發明多數滑架相關之各種電磁線圈的啓動的示 意圖; 圖1 5爲圖1 3磁鐵元件與圖i 2所示感測器陣列之相關、及 磁鐵元件通過靜態感測器產生之訊號流; 圖1 5 A爲採用多工之本發明控制系統另一實施例的示意圖; 圖15B爲代表本發明控制系統的一實施例用之感測器陣列 的另一實施例之俯視圖,該控制系統係採用多工; 圖16爲代表一密封爪與一管相接合配置之凸輪實施例; 圖1 7爲本發明控制系統的一實施例用之位置目標相對於 時間目標圖的圖示; 圖1 8爲本發明控制系統的一實施例用之表偏移矯正技術 之示意圖; 圖18A爲各滑架的一位置輪廓圖,顯示滑架位置相對於時 間的資料; 圖18B圖示利用第一及第二時間間隔以監測滑架之方法; 圖19爲本發明的滑架另一實施例之立體圖; 圖20爲採用圖19所示滑架之密封次總成之立體圖; 圖2 1爲具有一慣性鎖之滑架之平面圖; 圖22爲密封次總成及滑架之另一實施例之立體圖; •圖23爲圖22之滑架的立體圖; -14 - 本紙張尺度適用中囤國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填k本頁) 訂_' 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 知58 9 24 五、發明說明(12 ) 圖2 4爲圖23之滑架的後立體圖; 圖25A爲圖2 3之滑架的一軌道從動件之俯視圖; 圖25B爲圖23之滑架的另一軌道從動件之俯视圖; 圖25C爲其侧視圖; 圖25D爲圖23之滑架的另一軌道從動件之俯視圖; 圖26爲圖22之次總成之侧視圖; 圖27爲圖22之次總成之切開平面圖; 圖2 8爲圖2 2之次總成之切開立體圖; 囷29爲圖22之總成的平面圖,其中描述自一管形成一包 裝; 圖30爲圖22的次總成之一制動系統的立體圖; 圖31爲圖22的次總成之俯視圖; 圖32顯示根據本發明之密封爪之分解圖; 圖3 3顯示根據本發明之組裝的密封爪; 圖34顯示根據本發明之一密封爪總成,包括圖33的密封 爪; 圖35顯示安裝在一底盤上的圖34之密封爪總成; 圖3 6顯示圖3 5的密封爪總成之部份分解圖; 圖37顯示一次級變墨器捲繞部、密封爪總成、底盤及通 過一主要變壓器捲繞部之滑架; 圖3 8顯示一次級變壓器捲繞部; 圖39A及39B分別顯示主要變壓器捲繞部之正視及後視圖; 圖40顯示主要及次級變壓器捲繞部之一共軛位置的俯視 1SL · 樹, -15 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------^ - II (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填,kt頁) -SJ· --線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458924 a? ----------- - 五、發明說明(13 ) 圖41A及41B顯示設有軸承表面之主要及次級變壓器線圈 之實施例的俯視圖; 圖4 2顯示配合本發明密封爪總成的電組件之電源供應器 的方塊圖; ° 圖43顯示本發明智慧型電源供應器作業之邏輯流程圖; 圖4 4顯示根據本發明之一環境中的縱密封爪結構; 圖45顯示圖44所示的密封爪總成之分解圖; 圖46A及46B顯示圖44所示密封爪的兩分解圖;及 圖4 7爲實施本發明各種特徵之系統的另一實施例圖示, 且描述材料織物的縱向密封之一較佳方法。 發明之詳細説明 本發明各種元件用於已知包裝機中時可成爲各種形式, 圖1及47概描述一種成型、充填及密封(FFS)包裝機,其常 用於在各尺寸的圓柱形、糖球形或平行六面體容器中包裝 食品(如果汁)。 圖1及47所示FFS包裝機10中,包括至少一熱密封表面14 的包裝材料之一織物1 2係在導輥1 6及1 8上往前進給摺成一 管20,織物的縱向疊置侧緣22、24進行熱密封而完成該管 。產品在一充填站2 6供入閉管中,而充填的管係進給至一 熱密封站28。在熱密封站處,管沿管長度在等距相隔位置 與其長度呈横向密封。之後’管在熱密封區域邊界内係呈 橫向切斷,以形成充填有產品之各別包裝34。 各包裝必須充填有一致的產品容積,尤其FFS包裝機中, 藉由在密封時製造等容積的各包裝24以提供此容積的一致 -16- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填貧本頁)458924, description of the invention (9 five relative movement between A7 B7 frame and the first track ~ ^ ^ 1 # ^ movement. The active element is controlled to guide the Ang Yi slide head 'Λ m ^ along the first track, so it can be used in the material The first process is used on the fabric ... «The second path is at least partly used for packaging operations. The method can also include installing a majority of the second carriage 'to independently move with respect to the second track: the second track to make the majority The active element is operatively related to at least one reactive element of the :: !! frame to generate a relative displacement between the second slide and the second track, so that at least one second tool is associated with each brother and the carriage To perform at least part of the packaging operation and control the activation of the active element. The second carriage has been associated with at least one reactive element, and each active element has been independently activated to control between the second carriage and the second track The moving element is controlled to guide the first and first carriages along its various tracks, so the first and second tools can be used on the material fabric for at least part of the packaging operation. The method may also include : Linking along the first and second paths The first and second carriages are moved together, and the first and second tools cooperate to perform the packaging operation. The packaging operation may include sealing a part of the material fabric with the seal of the first tool. The packaging operation may also include: Between the first and second carriages, the first and second tools are used to hold and pull the material fabric at a substantially fixed speed. The method may also include: detecting a portion of the material fabric relative to the first and second The positions of the two carriage positions, and the first and second carriages are positioned to align with an alignment mark on the material fabric to produce objects of approximately uniform size. _ BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The preferred features of the present invention are disclosed in the drawings , Where similar numbers represent similar components in each drawing, of which: -12 This paper size applies to the ten national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (2J0 X 297 mm) -------------- Ge — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order _-line. Consumption Cooperation by Employees, Intellectual Property Office, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Du-print -458924 V. Description of the Invention (10) Figure 1 shows the various features of the invention Of an embodiment of the forming, filling and sealing packaging machine Schematic diagram; Figure 2 is a perspective view of a heat-sealed subassembly describing one of the various features of the present invention; Figure 3 is a plan view of the subassembly shown in Figure 2; Figure 4 is a side view of the right side of the subassembly shown in Figure 3 Figure 5 is a perspective view of the heat seal assembly of Figure 1, which describes that the seal claws of the second assembly are aligned with the seal claws of the other assembly; Figure 6 is a description of two heats of three carriages used in each assembly Plan view of the sealed sub-assembly; FIG. 7 is a top view of the sub-assembly shown in FIGS. 2 and 3; FIG. 8 is a perspective view of a carriage in an unengaged position according to an embodiment of the present invention; A perspective view of the carriage in the engaged position; FIG. 8B is a perspective view of the first embodiment of the knife according to the present invention; FIG. 8C is a side view thereof; FIG. 8D is a detail view of the cutting edge green; and FIG. 8E-H are A plan view of another embodiment of a knife constructed according to the present invention; FIG. 9 is a plan view describing a pair of carriages with aligned seal claws; FIG. 9A is a perspective view of another embodiment of a carriage constructed according to the present invention; A system for specifically describing the relationship between a coil and a carriage to implement various features of the present invention A schematic diagram of an embodiment; FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a closed-loop control system used in the present invention; FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the track AA of FIG. 11A; CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) I ^ 1 ^ 1 1 · ϋ «II ϋ I:-: (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) On a · • Line · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives "r 4 58 9 24 A7-B7 V. Description of the Invention (11) Figure 12 is an example of a control system of a carriage according to the present invention-sensor. Array and matching Magnet diagram; Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a magnetic component used in the control system of the present invention; Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the activation of various electromagnetic coils related to most carriages of the present invention; Fig. 15 is Fig. 1 3 The relationship between the magnet element and the sensor array shown in FIG. I 2 and the signal flow generated by the magnet element through the static sensor; FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the control system of the present invention using multiplexing; 15B is a sensing device representing an embodiment of the control system of the present invention. Top view of another embodiment of the array, the control system is multiplexed; Figure 16 is a cam embodiment representing a sealing claw and a tube joint configuration; Figure 17 is a position of an embodiment of the control system of the present invention Figure of target vs. time target; Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of the table offset correction technology used in an embodiment of the control system of the present invention; Figure 18A is a position outline of each carriage, showing the position of the carriage relative to Time data; FIG. 18B illustrates the method of monitoring the carriage using the first and second time intervals; FIG. 19 is a perspective view of another embodiment of the carriage of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a seal using the carriage shown in FIG. 19 A perspective view of the subassembly; FIG. 21 is a plan view of a carriage having an inertia lock; FIG. 22 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a sealed subassembly and a carriage; FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the carriage of FIG. 22; -14-This paper size applies to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order _ 'Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 Know 58 9 24 V. Invention (12) FIG. 24 is a rear perspective view of the carriage of FIG. 23; FIG. 25A is a top view of a track follower of the carriage of FIG. 23; FIG. 25B is another track follower of the carriage of FIG. Figure 25C is a side view; Figure 25D is a top view of another track follower of the carriage of Figure 23; Figure 26 is a side view of the secondary assembly of Figure 22; Figure 27 is a secondary assembly of Figure 22 Figure 2 8 is a cut-away perspective view of the secondary assembly of Figure 22; Figure 29 is a plan view of the assembly of Figure 22, depicting the formation of a package from a tube; Figure 30 is a sub-assembly of Figure 22 A perspective view of a braking system; FIG. 31 is a top view of the subassembly of FIG. 22; FIG. 32 shows an exploded view of a sealing claw according to the present invention; FIG. 33 shows a sealing claw assembled according to the present invention; One seal claw assembly includes the seal claw of FIG. 33; FIG. 35 shows the seal claw assembly of FIG. 34 mounted on a chassis; FIG. 36 shows a partially exploded view of the seal claw assembly of FIG. 35; 37 shows the winding section of the primary ink changer, the seal claw assembly, the chassis and the carriage passing through the winding section of a main transformer; Figure 38 shows the primary transformer winding section; Figures 39A and 39B show the front and rear views of the primary transformer winding section, respectively; Figure 40 shows the 1SL tree top view of the conjugate position of one of the primary and secondary transformer winding sections,- 15-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- ^-II (Please read the notes on the back before filling in, kt Page) -SJ · --Line. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458924 a? ------------V. Description of the invention (13) Figure 41A and 41B show the bearing surface Top view of the embodiment of the primary and secondary transformer coils; Figure 4 2 shows a block diagram of a power supply for an electrical component with a sealed claw assembly of the present invention; ° Figure 43 shows the logic flow of the operation of the intelligent power supply of the present invention Figures 4 and 4 show a longitudinal seal claw structure in an environment according to the present invention; Figure 45 shows an exploded view of the seal claw assembly shown in Figure 44; Figures 46A and 46B show two exploded views of the seal claw shown in Figure 44 And FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of a system for implementing various features of the present invention, and describes a material. One of the preferred methods for longitudinal sealing of fabrics. Detailed description of the invention The various components of the present invention can take various forms when used in known packaging machines. Figures 1 and 47 outline a molding, filling and sealing (FFS) packaging machine, which is commonly used in various sizes of cylindrical, sugar and Packaging of food (if juice) in spherical or parallelepiped containers. In the FFS packaging machine 10 shown in FIGS. 1 and 47, one of the packaging materials including the at least one heat-sealing surface 14 is a fabric 12, which is advanced on the guide rollers 16 and 18 to be folded into a tube 20, and the fabric is stacked longitudinally. The sides 22, 24 are heat sealed to complete the tube. The product is fed into a closed pipe at a filling station 26, and the filled pipe system is fed to a heat sealing station 28. At the heat-sealing station, the tube is sealed transversely to its length at equidistant intervals along the length of the tube. The 'tubes are then cut transversely within the boundaries of the heat-sealed area to form individual packages 34 filled with the product. Each package must be filled with a consistent product volume, especially in the FFS packaging machine, by manufacturing each package 24 of equal volume at the time of sealing to provide a consistent volume of this volume -16- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

C 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -_戈------訂------- ---線-7^1--------------------- 五、發明說明(Μ ) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 性,故f使各職向㈣㈣物長度形成於等距相隔位置 。本發明尤適合使包裝材料以高速率通過包裝機—致地進 行橫向密封、,這些密封具有完全的整體性且彼此均句相隔 往前速度之速率較佳大致固定,故未必需要開始、停止 '或減緩包裝的移動。 進一步參照圖1及47,圖示的FFS機包括—熱密封總成4〇 ’其具體實施本發明的各種特徵。如圖所示,包裝材料的 平坦織物12往前進給通過FFS機,如圖的箭頭所示。 當織物移動通過機器時連續摺成一管狀構造且沿其縱尺寸 密封而界定一管20 ^在管往前供過包裝機時,某數量的產 w(如液體或其他產品)流入或送入管中。在一橫向密封站 2 8處’充填的管自其相對侧4 2及4 4擠壓以在管橫向界定一 逢封£46 ^在沿管長+距相隔位置處與其長度作橫向密 封。之後’管在各橫向密封邊界内切斷成爲產品的各別密 封包裝3 4。 根據本發明之一型態,密封總成4〇包括第一及第二密封 爪次總成48及50,其第一者配置在充填管—侧42上,第二 者5 0配置在管的相對側44上。第一及第二密封爪次總成彼 此概呈鏡像,各個次總成包括多數滑架5 2、5 3,其安裝以 沿一组軌道58、60界定的各路徑作週期性移動,如圖4所 示。爲清楚起見,圖i顯示每個次總成僅有一滑架,但圖6 、10、11A及29中,各次總成較佳包括安裝之多數滑架52 、53、150、152、154。 各路徑包括一段6 2、6 4,其中限制一各別次總成的滑架 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填t本頁)C Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy -_ 戈 -------- Order ------- --- line-7 ^ 1 -------------- ------- V. Description of invention (M) A7 B7 The printing of consumer cooperatives by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, so that the length of each job is formed at equidistant intervals. The present invention is particularly suitable for allowing packaging materials to pass through the packaging machine at a high rate-for transverse sealing. These seals have complete integrity and are spaced from each other. The speed of the forward speed is preferably approximately fixed, so it is not necessary to start and stop Or slow down the packaging. With further reference to Figs. 1 and 47, the illustrated FFS machine includes a heat seal assembly 40 'which embodies various features of the present invention. As shown, the flat fabric 12 of the packaging material advances through the FFS machine as shown by the arrows. When the fabric is moved through the machine, it is continuously folded into a tubular structure and sealed along its longitudinal dimension to define a tube 20 ^ When the tube is fed past the packaging machine, a certain amount of production (such as liquid or other products) flows into or into the tube in. At a transverse sealing station 28, the 'filled pipe is squeezed from its opposite sides 4 2 and 4 4 to define a seal in the transverse direction of the pipe £ 46 ^ A transverse seal is made to its length at a distance along the pipe length + distance. The 'tubes are then cut into individual sealed packages 34 of the product within the respective transverse sealing boundaries. According to a form of the present invention, the sealing assembly 40 includes first and second sealing claw sub-assemblies 48 and 50, the first of which is disposed on the filling tube-side 42, and the second of which is 50 disposed on the tube. Opposite side 44. The first and second seal claw sub-assemblies are mirror images of each other. Each sub-assembly includes a plurality of carriages 5 2, 5 3, which are installed to periodically move along each path defined by a set of rails 58, 60, as shown in the figure. 4 shown. For clarity, Figure i shows that there is only one carriage per sub-assembly, but in Figures 6, 10, 11A, and 29, each sub-assembly preferably includes most of the carriages 52, 53, 150, 152, 154 installed. . Each path includes a section 6 2, 6 4 in which the carriage of each sub assembly is restricted (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

C -17- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4规格(210 X 297公釐) 1--------訂 --------線_ ------------------------ .h. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 '4924 a7 ----------B7 _ 五、發明說明(15 ) ,而與往前移動的管20同時移動。本發明中,各次總成之各 多數滑架係在任何時間點沿其各別路徑自由移至任何位置 ’而與其他各多數滑架的移動及不移動無關。但是,一已 知次總成的兩個滑架不可能同時佔據相同空間。 各滑架52較佳包括一密封爪70,其設計接合移動織物的 一侧42、對於織物施壓、並在往前移動充填管2〇橫向形成 一熱密封。爲了進行管20的一橫向密封,第—次總成48的 密封爪70必須與第二次總成50之一密封爪71相對齊,管 2 〇在足以進行所需橫向密封的限定時間中係配置於密封爪 70、71之間,一較佳熱密封機構係揭示於圖32_46B中。 圖1及47顯示上述類型的成型、充填及密封機,其中採 用本發明之一密封爪總成。利用此機,一材料織物丨2最終 轉換成充填有一液體、固體或其他材料之一密封容器34。 圖47中,織物12摺成一管且由縱密封爪700作縱向密封, 且亦經由噴嘴26連續充填,随後,織物進入一在一橫密封 爪總成7 0與一後備爪總成7 1間形成之空間。如圖1及4 7所 示’密封爪總成70及後備爪總成71安裝在沿圖中呈卵形的 各連續承載裝置48、50行進之滑架上,瞭解可設置不只一 個此成對之一密封爪及一後備爪。 因爲密封爪總成70沿連續承載裝置48的軌道作連續移動 ,亦因爲可提供不只一個此總成,可能不便對於密封爪總 成7 0上的密封感應器提供一束缚的動力連接。因此,提供 一空氣隙變壓器(air-gap transformer),變壓器係由一主要變 壓器播繞部及一次級變壓器捲繞部所形成,此情形中,主 -18 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填象本頁) αC -17- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1 -------- Order -------- Line_ ------- ----------------- .h. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs' 4924 a7 ---------- B7 _ V. Description of the invention ( 15), and the tube 20 moves at the same time. In the present invention, each of the plurality of carriages of each sub-assembly is free to move to any position along its respective path at any point in time, irrespective of the movement and non-movement of the other plurality of carriages. However, two carriages of a known subassembly cannot occupy the same space at the same time. Each carriage 52 preferably includes a sealing claw 70 designed to engage one side 42 of the moving fabric, apply pressure to the fabric, and move the filling tube 20 forward to form a heat seal laterally. In order to perform a lateral sealing of the tube 20, the sealing claw 70 of the first assembly 48 must be aligned with one of the sealing claws 71 of the second assembly 50, and the tube 20 is bounded within a limited time sufficient to perform the required lateral sealing. Arranged between the sealing claws 70 and 71, a preferred heat sealing mechanism is disclosed in Figs. 32-46B. Figures 1 and 47 show a forming, filling and sealing machine of the type described above, in which a sealing jaw assembly according to the invention is used. With this machine, a fabric of material 2 is finally converted into a sealed container 34 filled with one of a liquid, solid or other material. In FIG. 47, the fabric 12 is folded into a tube and longitudinally sealed by the longitudinal sealing claw 700, and is also continuously filled through the nozzle 26. Subsequently, the fabric enters a horizontal sealing claw assembly 7 0 and a backup claw assembly 7 1 Formed space. As shown in Figures 1 and 4 'The sealing claw assembly 70 and the backup claw assembly 71 are installed on the carriage that travels along each of the continuous bearing devices 48 and 50 in an oval shape. It is understood that more than one pair can be set. One seal jaw and one backup jaw. Because the sealing claw assembly 70 continuously moves along the track of the continuous bearing device 48, and because more than one such assembly can be provided, it may be inconvenient to provide a bounded power connection for the sealing inductor on the sealing claw assembly 70. Therefore, an air-gap transformer is provided. The transformer is formed by a main transformer winding section and a primary transformer winding section. In this case, the main -18-this paper size applies to the Chinese national standard (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) α

U』- H ^1 ^1 ^1 ^1 ^1 I ^ ml —1 ϋ - J t I I I IU 』-H ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 I ^ ml —1 ϋ-J t I I I I

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 =變壓器捲繞部固定安裝在連續承载裝置或成型、充填及 密封機10之其他部份,而次級變壓器捲繞部安裝在密封爪 總成7 0本身卜。 圖32顯示根據本發明形成的密封爪213〇之分解立體圖, 密封爪2130包括一長形殼體2132,長形殼體2132設有一頂 表面2134(其形成有一凹陷區域2136)。殼體2132較佳由塑膠 、環氧樹脂、縮醛樹脂(Delrin)或熟悉本技藝者瞭解的其他 材料形成,凹陷區域設有各種型態包括:一長形刀槽2138 以接收一切刀、一轉柱214〇、及一對平行表面槽2142a、 2142b 〇 各表面槽的形狀及尺寸可接收多數U型核心嵌件2144,其 以端點對端點的配置方式沿表面通路長度形成一連續核心 通路。核心嵌件2144由一高滲透性磁性材料(亦即具·有大於 空氣的滲透性之一磁性材料)形成,以幫助加強感應加熱。 較佳,核心嵌件由MnZn或NiZn肥粒鐵構成,但可依作業頻 率使用其他磁性材料。 形成具有端點2148a、2148b的一圈且連接至密封感應器端 子2150a、2150b之一密封感應器2146係分別置於核心嵌件 2144形成的核心通路中,密封感應器係沿_核心通路往下 延伸、環繞該柱2140、並沿第二核心通路回行。另一實施 例中,密封感應器直接置於槽2142a、2142b中而不具有核 心嵌件2144的優點。不論密封感應器是否置於核心通路中 、或直接置入槽中,其自密封表面凹入使之在密封作業期 間不接觸材料織物。爲了進一步確保密封感應器與材料織 -19- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱)~~Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs = The transformer winding section is fixedly installed on the continuous load device or other parts of the molding, filling and sealing machine 10, and the secondary transformer winding section is installed on the sealing claw assembly 7 0 itself Bu. Fig. 32 shows an exploded perspective view of a sealing claw 2130 formed according to the present invention. The sealing claw 2130 includes an elongated housing 2132 provided with a top surface 2134 (which is formed with a recessed area 2136). The housing 2132 is preferably formed of plastic, epoxy resin, acetal resin (Delrin) or other materials familiar to those skilled in the art. The recessed area is provided with various types including: a long sipe 2138 to receive all knives, a The shape and size of each of the rotating columns 214〇 and a pair of parallel surface grooves 2142a, 2142b 〇 can receive most U-shaped core inserts 2144, which form a continuous core along the length of the surface path in an end-to-end configuration. path. The core insert 2144 is formed of a highly permeable magnetic material (that is, a magnetic material having a permeability greater than that of air) to help enhance induction heating. Preferably, the core insert is composed of MnZn or NiZn ferrous iron, but other magnetic materials can be used depending on the operating frequency. Form a circle with end points 2148a, 2148b and connect to one of the sealed inductor terminals 2150a, 2150b. The sealed inductor 2146 is placed in the core path formed by the core insert 2144, respectively, and the sealed inductor is down the core path. Extend, surround the post 2140, and return along the second core pathway. In another embodiment, the sealed inductor is placed directly in the slots 2142a, 2142b without the advantage of a core insert 2144. Regardless of whether the sealed sensor is placed in the core path or directly into the groove, it is recessed from the sealing surface so that it does not touch the material fabric during the sealing operation. In order to further ensure the sealed sensor and material weaving -19- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ~~

A7 B7 五、發明說明(17 ) 物之間的分離,若出現整體凹陷區域(包括密封感應器及核 心通路),則較佳覆有一不導電的環氧樹脂村料。 —較佳實施例中,密封感應器2 1 4 6由多束的多重各別絕 緣瓣編線股(概稱爲鉸合線)所構成。此較佳實施例中,,密 封感應器包含具平坦48-5-44辦编(4 8束中各有5股,各股 包含44個AWG線)之鉸合線,且雖顯示單圈的鉸合線,應 瞭解可用多圈鉸合線以密封感應器,可依照申請人的目前 需求來採用其他鉸合線構造,圖3 3顯示组裝的密封爪2130 ’圖中顯示密封感應器插入核心2132時之型態。 圖34顯示根據本發明之密封爪總成2160,密封爪總成包 括至少一電容2162及密封爪2130,密封爪2130具有密封作 業時朝向一密封方向之一密封表面2152,電容2162分別具 有連接至密封感應器端子2150a、2150b之端子2164a、2164b ’因而使電容2162與密封感應器爲並聯連接,故形成密封 爪總成2160上内建之一槽電路。一較佳實施例中,密封爪 總成2160亦設有提供密封爪2130及電容2162相附接之一安 裝結構2166,且一對支撑腳2168a、2168b係附接至安裝結構 ,支撑腳在端點分別設有凸輪從動件2170a、2170b,電容 2162較佳具有0.27# F之一靜電容量且額定爲50安培RMS 以處理高感應電流,且在作業期間,密封感應器2146以1 0 · 20%的任務循環呈約3千瓦的脈衝。 圖35顯示一密封爪結構2171,其包括圖34中安裝在一底 盤2172上之密封爪總成2160,密封爪總成2160可相對底盤 2172沿雙向箭頭所示方向移動》在密封作業的適當點,密 -20 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填㊉本頁)A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (17) If there is a whole recessed area (including the sealed sensor and the core path), it is better to cover it with a non-conductive epoxy resin. -In the preferred embodiment, the sealed sensor 2 1 4 6 is composed of a plurality of bundles of a plurality of individually insulated braided strands (referred to as hinge lines). In this preferred embodiment, the hermetically sealed sensor includes a hinged wire with flat 48-5-44 pieces (5 strands in each of 48 bundles, each strand containing 44 AWG wires), and although showing a single turn For the hinge line, it should be understood that multiple turns of the hinge line can be used to seal the sensor. Other hinge line structures can be used according to the applicant's current needs. Figure 3 3 shows the assembled sealing claw 2130. Core 2132 is the type. FIG. 34 shows a sealing claw assembly 2160 according to the present invention. The sealing claw assembly includes at least a capacitor 2162 and a sealing claw 2130. The sealing claw 2130 has a sealing surface 2152 facing a sealing direction during sealing operation. The capacitor 2162 has a connection to The terminals 2164a and 2164b of the sealed sensor terminals 2150a and 2150b thus connect the capacitor 2162 and the sealed inductor in parallel, so a slot circuit is built in the sealed claw assembly 2160. In a preferred embodiment, the sealing claw assembly 2160 is also provided with a mounting structure 2166 that provides a connection between the sealing claw 2130 and the capacitor 2162, and a pair of supporting feet 2168a, 2168b are attached to the mounting structure, with the supporting feet at the ends. There are cam followers 2170a and 2170b at each point. The capacitor 2162 preferably has an electrostatic capacity of 0.27 # F and is rated at 50 amps RMS to handle high induced current. During operation, the sealed inductor 2146 is 1 0 · 20 The% duty cycle is pulsed at about 3 kW. FIG. 35 shows a sealing claw structure 2171, which includes a sealing claw assembly 2160 mounted on a chassis 2172 in FIG. 34. The sealing claw assembly 2160 can move relative to the chassis 2172 in the direction shown by the double-headed arrow. , 密 -20-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

C 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -*'!--------訂--------------------------------- 458 924 A7 ---------B7__ 五、發明說明(18 ) 封爪總成將在此方向(稱爲密封方向)移動,使密封表面 2152配合一操作後備爪抵靠住一材料織物。一次級變壓器 捲繞部2174經由安裝框架2176固定安裝在底盤以”,次級 變壓器2174係與電容2162及密封爪2130形成的槽電路呈並 聯電連接。較佳,次級變壓器捲繞部經由可撓引線218〇連 接至槽電路。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 次級變壓器捲繞部2174與端子2150a、2164a、2150b、 2164b之間的可撓導線2180具有足夠餘裕,使密封爪總成可 在相對於次級變壓器捲繞部2174固定的底盤2172之密封方 向中平移。較佳,可撓引線218〇由鉸合線構成,更佳,此 特定應用之鉸合線爲具有一聚尼龍絕緣膜覆層之48_3〇_44 平坦鉸合線《因爲密封作業期間密封爪總成僅相對底盤移 動數吋,次級變壓器捲繞部2174與密封感應器2146之間的 可撓引鉸合線長度很短。並且,因爲在此短段行進之電流 通常很高(约5 0安培範園),故需降低可撓線長度(因而降低 電阻)。較佳,次級變壓器捲繞部2174與密封感應器2146之 間距小於18”、更佳小於12”、最佳小於8”。雖在較佳實施 例中,平坦48-30-44鉸合線用於可撓引線2180中,應瞭解 此鉸合線可爲任何構造(如圓形或平坦狀)且可用任何的束 數、各束股數、及號數。一般而言,鉸合線尺寸必須處理 應用的目前需求,此外,可撓的鉸合引線可有任何類型的 外絕緣且可能有或可能沒有一外辮编的纖維或尼龍。 圖36顯示密封爪結構2171之分解圖,顯示可撓引線2180 連接至密封感應器端子2150a、2150b及電容端子2164a、 -21 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準<CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 458924 A7 B7 五、發明說明(19 ) 2164b之可撓引線端子2182a、2182b。圖36亦顯示底盤2172 .安裝之滑架2184。 圖37顯示密封爪結構2171中對於主要變壓器捲繞部支撐 表面2192上安裝之一主要變壓器捲繞部2190呈共軛之次級 變壓器捲繞部2174,主要與次級變壓器捲繞部的共軛位置 係形成一空氣隙變壓器2194。較佳,主要及次級變壓器捲 繞部之間隙約爲0.2至0 · 7公厘、且最佳約爲〇 . 4公厘,但 間隙可爲此範園以外的其他値,而較小的間隙係造成較高 的效率。在較佳實施例中間隙可設有墊片,但亦可直接接 觸。係由直接接觸主要與次級變壓器捲繞部兩侧之轴承表 面,將此間隙保持固定。 當滑架2184沿一預定路徑(譬如上述連績承載裝置)移動 時,密封爪結構2171的其餘部份隨之移動。因此,密封爪 總成2160與底盤2172(承載空氣隙變壓器2194的次級變壓器 捲繞部2174)皆隨之移動。在次級變壓器捲繞部2174開始通 過主要變壓器捲繞部2192範園之前,由於凸輪從動件2170a 、2170b的凸輪作用,裝在密封爪總成216〇上的密封爪2130 及其互補的後備爪係在材料織物上閉合。但是,固定在底 盤2172上的次級變壓器捲繞部2174並未隨密封爪總成移動 ,故與主要變壓器捲繞部2192作磁性耦合。當密封爪2130 及其互補性後備爪移動通過密封區域時,次級變壓器捲繞 部2174通過時極接近靜態主要變壓器捲繞部2192,因此, 形成空氣隙變壓器2194時,主要2190及次級2174變壓器捲 繞邵彼此實際絕不接觸a所生成的空氣隙變壓器僅維持對 -22- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) ί請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -—戈--------tr---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ------------------------ A7 458 924 --------B7__ 五、發明說明(2〇 ) 於電容2162形成的槽電路及密封感應器2146供應能量之短 暫期間。 當次級變壓器捲繞部2174通過主要變壓器捲繞部2190面 時,電源供應器之RF訊號產生器係產生傳送過空氣隙變壓 器2194並進入密封感應器2146之電能,因此密姆住包裝。 較佳實施例中,密封感應器2146以2 0 %的任務循環約有3千 瓦的脈衝,但如上述使用自動微調時,係可改變這些値。 應瞭解在本發明的空氣隙變壓器中,主要及次級變壓器 捲繞邵可各有任何圈數且可提供任何的圈比値。並且,捲 繞部亦可由任何型導體材料(如铜、銅管件及鋁與其他)構 成,此外,主要與次級變壓器捲繞部的核心所用材料可爲 任何類型,譬如,捲繞部核心可由具有高磁滲透性(本文界 定爲大於1之滲透性)之一材料形成(如肥粒鐵或鐵);另可 由低磁滲透性的一材料(譬如空氣或塑膠)構成。並五,轴 承表面可由任何數量的不導電塑勝材料構成(如縮經樹脂及 類似物)。此外,軸承表面本身可包含滾子或導件或其他結 構,以幫助主要及次級變壓器捲繞部相對齊、並維持所需 間隙。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如圖35所示,電容2162放置接近密封感應器2146、亦接 近次級變壓器捲繞部2174,但經由可撓引線2180相連接。 本發明所用類型之感應密封爪採用磁感應以在一疊層包裝 材料(亦即織物)的鋁箔層中生熱,利用電容並聯的密封感 應器2146產生在鋁箔中引發渦流所需的磁力,此組合稱爲 槽電路。密封感應器2146及電容2162共同產生進行密封之 -23- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家楳準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 924 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -------B7__五、發明說明(21 ) 一高電流共振頻率電路,電容2162鄭近密封爪總成2160中 的密封感應器2146主要因爲兩者間之短路徑而有助於實施 效率’亦可以比電容位於主要侧所可能的情形更低之電流 値’自主要變壓器捲繞部將電能傳至次級變壓器捲繞部。 密封作業期間’產生一高電壓低損失訊號並送到槽電路 ’槽電路產生一低電壓之大交流電流,流過密封感應器之 父流電流係產生一磁場強度,磁場強度則在包裝材料的鋁 0層内產生渴流,這些滿流產生阻熱(resjstjve heat),阻熱 係熱傳導至内部熱塑性密封層,使之升高超過溶點。當兩 個此相對密封層藉由密封爪2130動作及其互補性後備爪所 壓合時’形成一隱藏密封。由於槽電路置於可移式密封爪 總成2160上,大的交流電流僅在密封區域中流通,故消除 顯著的導體長度量及輸送段中之所生成渦流損失。因爲此 增加的效率及降低的熱損失,可能不需要提供冷卻劑通路 及冷卻劑流體以》肖除過度熱量,如部份上述案件所示。 如上述參照圖34,密封爪總成2160設有凸輪從動件2170a 、2170b ’凸輪從動件係使可移式密封爪總成216〇遇到裝在 一連續承載裝置上的密封爪凸輪時在相對底盤2172及滑架 2184之侧向中移動。遇到密封爪凸輪時,凸輪從動件217〇a 、2170b將承載密封爪凸輪上,因此迫使可移式密封爪總成 2160位於遠離底盤2172與滑架2184的一方向中。另一方面 ’因爲剛性連接至滑架2184,凸輪動作不會擾亂底盤2172 ’一旦凸輪從動件2170a、2170b自密封爪凸輪下降,可移 式密封爪總成2160移回其原始或“靜態,’位置。 -24-C Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy-* '! -------- Order -------------------------- ------- 458 924 A7 --------- B7__ 5. Description of the invention (18) The sealing claw assembly will move in this direction (called the sealing direction), so that the sealing surface 2152 cooperates with an operation The backup claw rests on a material fabric. The primary transformer winding part 2174 is fixedly installed on the chassis through a mounting frame 2176. The secondary transformer 2174 is electrically connected in parallel with a slot circuit formed by the capacitor 2162 and the sealing claw 2130. Preferably, the secondary transformer winding part is The flexible lead wire 218 is connected to the slot circuit. The flexible conductor 2180 between the secondary transformer winding part 2174 and the terminals 2150a, 2164a, 2150b, and 2164b printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has sufficient margin to make the sealing claw It can be translated in the sealing direction of the chassis 2172 fixed with respect to the secondary transformer winding 2174. Preferably, the flexible lead wire 218 is composed of a hinge wire, and more preferably, the hinge wire for this specific application has a 48_3〇_44 flat hinge line of nylon insulation film coating "Because the sealing claw assembly moves only a few inches relative to the chassis during the sealing operation, the flexible guide hinge between the secondary transformer winding 2174 and the sealing inductor 2146 The wire length is very short. And because the current traveling in this short section is usually very high (about 50 amps), it is necessary to reduce the flexible wire length (thus reducing the resistance). Better, secondary Winding the pressure sensor portion 2174 and the seal 2146 is smaller than the spacing 18 ", more preferably less than 12", most preferably less than 8. " Although in the preferred embodiment, a flat 48-30-44 hinge is used in the flexible lead 2180, it should be understood that the hinge can be of any configuration (such as round or flat) and can be used with any number of bundles, The number of shares and the number of each bundle. In general, the size of the hinge wire must address the current needs of the application. In addition, the flexible hinge lead can have any type of external insulation and may or may not have an outer braided fiber or nylon. Figure 36 shows an exploded view of the sealing claw structure 2171, showing that the flexible lead 2180 is connected to the sealed sensor terminals 2150a, 2150b and the capacitor terminals 2164a, -21-This paper size applies to the Chinese national standard < CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) 458924 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (19) 2164b Flexible lead terminals 2182a, 2182b. Figure 36 also shows the chassis 2172. The mounted carriage 2184. FIG. 37 shows a secondary transformer winding part 2174 that is conjugated to one of the main transformer winding parts 2190 installed on the supporting surface 2192 of the main transformer winding part in the sealing claw structure 2171, and is mainly conjugated with the secondary transformer winding part. The position system forms an air-gap transformer 2194. Preferably, the gap between the winding part of the primary and secondary transformers is about 0.2 to 0.7 mm, and the best is about 0.4 mm, but the gap can be other than this range, and the smaller The gap system results in higher efficiency. In the preferred embodiment, the gap may be provided with a gasket, but it may also be in direct contact. This gap is kept in contact by directly contacting the bearing surfaces on both sides of the winding part of the secondary transformer. When the carriage 2184 moves along a predetermined path (such as the above-mentioned continuous load bearing device), the rest of the seal claw structure 2171 moves accordingly. Therefore, the seal claw assembly 2160 and the chassis 2172 (the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 carrying the air gap transformer 2194) are moved accordingly. Before the secondary transformer winding part 2174 began to pass through the main transformer winding part 2192, due to the cam action of the cam followers 2170a, 2170b, the sealing claw 2130 mounted on the sealing claw assembly 2160 and its complementary backup The claws are closed on the material fabric. However, the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 fixed on the chassis 2172 does not move with the sealing claw assembly, and is magnetically coupled with the main transformer winding portion 2192. When the sealing claw 2130 and its complementary backup claw move through the sealing area, the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 is very close to the static main transformer winding portion 2192 when passing. Therefore, when the air gap transformer 2194 is formed, the main 2190 and the secondary 2174 are formed. The windings of the transformer Shao actually never touch each other. The air-gap transformer generated is only maintained to -22- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 cm). Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again) ----- Ge -------- tr --------- Line · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ------------ ------------ A7 458 924 -------- B7__ V. Description of the invention (20) The short period of energy supply in the slot circuit formed by the capacitor 2162 and the sealed inductor 2146. When the secondary transformer winding 2174 passes through the surface of the main transformer winding 2190, the RF signal generator of the power supply generates electric energy that passes through the air-gap transformer 2194 and enters the sealed inductor 2146. Therefore, the packaging is densely packed. In the preferred embodiment, the sealed sensor 2146 has a pulse of about 3 kilowatts at a duty cycle of 20%, but when using the automatic trimming as described above, these chirps can be changed. It should be understood that in the air-gap transformer of the present invention, the windings of the primary and secondary transformers can each have any number of turns and can provide any turns ratio 値. In addition, the winding part can be composed of any type of conductor material (such as copper, copper pipe fittings, aluminum and others). In addition, the material used for the core of the winding part of the primary and secondary transformers can be any type, such as the core of the winding part It can be formed of a material with high magnetic permeability (defined as permeability greater than 1) (such as ferrous iron or iron); it can also be made of a material with low magnetic permeability (such as air or plastic). Also, the bearing surface can be made of any number of non-conductive plastic materials (such as warp resin and the like). In addition, the bearing surface itself may include rollers or guides or other structures to help align the primary and secondary transformer windings and maintain the required clearance. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs As shown in FIG. 35, the capacitor 2162 is placed close to the sealed inductor 2146 and also close to the secondary transformer winding 2174, but is connected via a flexible lead 2180. The induction sealing claw of the type used in the present invention uses magnetic induction to generate heat in an aluminum foil layer of a laminated packaging material (ie, fabric), and uses a sealed inductor 2146 connected in parallel with a capacitor to generate the magnetic force required to induce eddy currents in the aluminum foil. This combination It is called a slot circuit. The sealed sensor 2146 and the capacitor 2162 jointly produce the sealed -23- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 924 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --- ---- B7__V. Description of the invention (21) A high current resonance frequency circuit, capacitor 2162 Zheng Jin sealed claw assembly 2160 sealed inductor 2146 is mainly due to the short path between the two to help implement efficiency ' It is also possible to lower the current than would be the case if the capacitor is located on the primary side. 'The power is transferred from the primary transformer winding to the secondary transformer winding. During the sealing operation, 'a high-voltage and low-loss signal is generated and sent to the tank circuit.' The tank circuit generates a large AC current with a low voltage. The current flowing through the father of the sealed inductor generates a magnetic field intensity. The magnetic field intensity is in the packaging material. Thirsty currents are generated in the aluminum 0 layer, and these full currents generate resjstjve heat, which is conducted to the internal thermoplastic sealing layer and rises above the melting point. A concealed seal is formed when the two opposing sealing layers are pressed by the action of the sealing claw 2130 and its complementary backup claw. Since the slot circuit is placed on the movable sealing claw assembly 2160, a large AC current flows only in the sealed area, so a significant amount of conductor length and the eddy current loss generated in the conveying section are eliminated. Because of this increased efficiency and reduced heat loss, it may not be necessary to provide coolant passages and coolant fluid to remove excess heat, as shown in some of the above cases. As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 34, the seal claw assembly 2160 is provided with cam followers 2170a, 2170b. The cam follower causes the movable seal claw assembly 216 to meet the seal claw cam mounted on a continuous load device. It moves sideways relative to the chassis 2172 and the carriage 2184. When encountering the seal claw cam, the cam followers 217oa, 2170b will carry the seal claw cam, so the movable seal claw assembly 2160 is forced to be located in a direction away from the chassis 2172 and the carriage 2184. On the other hand, 'Because it is rigidly connected to the carriage 2184, the cam action will not disturb the chassis 2172.' Once the cam followers 2170a, 2170b descend from the seal claw cam, the movable seal claw assembly 2160 moves back to its original or "static, 'Position. -24-

閱 讀 背 面 之 注 項 再 填V ! .1 I訂Read the notes on the back and fill in V! .1 I

_B7_ 五、發明說明(22 ) 圖38顯示次級變壓器捲繞部2174的放大圖,次級變壓器 .捲繞部2174包含一殼體2200,殼體較佳由塑膠或其他不導 電材料構成。較佳由肥粒鐵或其他適當高滲透性材料構成 之一E型核心2202係安裝在殼體2200内,捲在核心2202周園 之捲繞部2204較佳爲單圈鉸合線,但可採用多圈,任一情 形中,鉸合線捲繞部2204如上述連接至可撓性鉸合引線 2180,捲繞部2204及可撓引線2180更佳由一連續的鉸合線 段構成。 圖39A及39B描述主要變壓器捲繞部2190之正與後視圖, 如圖39A所示,主要變壓器捲繞部2190設有一長形殼體2210 ,其較佳比次級變壓器捲繞部2174之相對應殼體2200更高 。一E型核心2212係安裝在殼體2210内,E型核心2212包含 於殼體内呈端點與端點配置之一系列較小E型核心組件2214 ,主要變壓器捲繞部2190之E型核心组件較佳由一高滲透性 材料(如肥粒鐵)所構成。主要變壓器捲繞部2.190所用之捲 繞部2216包含單圈的鉸合線,如同次級變壓器捲繞部2174 之情形,且亦可採用多圈之鉸合線。鉸合線捲繞部2216的 端子端點2218a、2218b保持自由 '故可如下文詳述連接至一 電路感測板。 圖40顯示主要及次級變壓器捲繞部彼此靠近時之俯視圖 ,如圖40所示,次級2174及主要2190捲繞部中之E型肥粒 鐵核心2202、2212的寬度及剖面均各爲相同,因此,主要 變壓器捲繞部2190中的鉸合線捲繞部2212自次級變壓器捲 繞部2174中的鉸合線捲繞部2204直接跨越,故可有從主要 -25- 本紙張尺度遶用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1--------訂i 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 線I j----------------------- 五、發明說明(23 ) 變壓器捲繞部2190到次級變壓器捲繞部2174之最大能量傳 送,次級變壓器捲繞部2174經過主要變壓器捲繞部2190具 有一分離距離“d”。較佳實施例中,“d”爲0.4公厘範圍、 但可在0.2至0.7公厘範園内變動,較近的距離將更有效率 ,但增加兩個變壓器捲繞部之間相碰撞的危險。 圖41A及41B顯示採用分別在主要2190及次級2174捲繞部 殼體邵上形成的一對互補性軸承表面2220及2222,以避免 碰撞。主要變壓·器捲繞部安裝在一固定表面2192上,較佳 形成部扮之一連續承載裝置或一成型、充填及密封機之其 他部份,軸承表面2220、2222較佳由部份非導電材料形成 ’而不與主要及次級變壓器捲繞部的磁耦合相干擾。並且 ,如圖41A及41B所示,次級變壓器捲繞部2174經由一彈性 材料2224(如氣丁二烯橡膠襯套)固定至安裝框架2176,而 提供緩衝效應β因爲一次級變壓器捲繞部超過主要變壓器 捲繞部,故需要緩衝效應,次級變壓器捲繞部2174相關的 軸承表面2222係抵靠並移動超過主要變壓器捲繞部219〇相 關之轴承表面2220。如圖41Β所示,當主要及次級變壓器捲 繞部相關之軸承表面抵靠時,在主要與次級變壓器捲繞部 的有效部之間仍保留一間隙。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 可採用一種以已知頻率提供已知電壓進行密封作業之傳 統電源供應器,可對於材料織物及密封爪之特定组合來決 定此電源供應器之輸出電壓及頻率,且每當電源供應器發 動時即可使用這些數値。但是,由於作業狀況、電紅件變 差、密封爪疲勞之略微變化、及材料織物中的局部變化, -26- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS>A4視格(210 χ 297公釐) A7 B7 五、發明說明(24 ) 各密封作業用之精確相同電壓及頻率施加可能並不理想。 一較佳實施例中採用智慧型電源供應器,智慧型電源供應 器係決定密封爪電性負荷有材料織物時的共振頻率,然後 以該共振頻率來施加密封能量。 圖42描述根據本發明驅動一密封爪所需電路之方塊圖, 如圖42所示,一智慧型RF電源供應器2250係用以在密封作 業時將激勵訊號供予密封爪,智慧型RF電源供應器包括一 控制器2252(譬如微處理器、微控制器、FPGA、ASIC、或 類似物)、A _ C .羞生器電路2254,JL具有一感測電路2256。 —外部輸入2260(譬如告知智慧型RF電源供應器發動的一 訊號)常用以觸發一密封作業。較佳實施例中,藉由瞭解各 種滑架的精確位置、因此可決定特定密封爪何時可供執行 密封作業之一位置感應控制器,來提供外部輸入2260。 智慧型RF電源供應器2250之輸出係傳送至主要變壓器捲 繞部2262,其可包含多圈的一第一束之48 -3.0-44鉸合線 2264 ’次級變壓器捲繞部2266(可包含多圈之一第二束的 48-30-44鉸合線2268)係由該鉸合線2268的一可捷部份連 接至密封爪總成2270。可移式安裝密封爪總成2270的密封 爪底盤2272係相對於主要變壓器捲繞部2262隨滑架行進, 如箭頭2274所示。可撓鼓合線22 68與電容2276及密封感應 器2278呈並聯連接,電容2276及密封感應器2278安裝在密 封爪2280上。因此,可撓鉸合線2268較佳爲次級變壓器捲 .繞部2266之鉸合線的延伸部,並在一對節點2282a、2282b處 連接至電容2276及岔、封感應器2278 ^ —較佳實施例中,密 -27- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注ί項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製_B7_ 5. Description of the invention (22) Figure 38 shows an enlarged view of the secondary transformer winding part 2174. The secondary transformer. The winding part 2174 includes a housing 2200. The housing is preferably made of plastic or other non-conductive material. An E-shaped core 2202, which is preferably composed of ferrous iron or other appropriate highly permeable materials, is installed in the housing 2200. The winding portion 2204 wound around the core 2202 is preferably a single-turn hinge line, but it can be With multiple turns, in either case, the hinge wire winding portion 2204 is connected to the flexible hinge lead 2180 as described above, and the winding portion 2204 and the flexible lead 2180 are more preferably composed of a continuous hinge line segment. 39A and 39B describe front and rear views of the main transformer winding portion 2190. As shown in FIG. 39A, the main transformer winding portion 2190 is provided with an elongated housing 2210, which is better than that of the secondary transformer winding portion 2174. The corresponding housing 2200 is taller. An E-shaped core 2212 is installed in the housing 2210. The E-shaped core 2212 includes a series of smaller E-shaped core components 2214, which are end points and end points arranged in the housing. The main transformer winding part 2190 is an E-shaped core. The module is preferably composed of a highly permeable material such as ferrous iron. The winding part 2216 used in the main transformer winding part 2.190 includes a single-turn hinge wire, as in the case of the secondary transformer winding part 2174, and a multi-turn hinge wire can also be used. The terminal ends 2218a, 2218b of the hinge wire winding portion 2216 remain free, so they can be connected to a circuit sensing board as described in detail below. Figure 40 shows the top view of the windings of the primary and secondary transformers when they are close to each other. As shown in Figure 40, the widths and cross-sections of the E-shaped ferrous iron cores 2202 and 2212 in the secondary 2174 and the main 2190 winding sections are The same, therefore, the hinge winding portion 2212 in the primary transformer winding portion 2190 directly spans from the hinge winding portion 2204 in the secondary transformer winding portion 2174, so there may be a difference from the main -25- Bypassing the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Line I j ----------------------- 5. Description of the invention (23) Maximum energy of transformer winding 2190 to secondary transformer winding 2174 In transmission, the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 has a separation distance "d" through the primary transformer winding portion 2190. In the preferred embodiment, "d" is in the range of 0.4 mm, but can be changed in the range of 0.2 to 0.7 mm. The shorter distance will be more efficient, but the danger of collision between the two windings of the transformer is increased. . Figures 41A and 41B show the use of a pair of complementary bearing surfaces 2220 and 2222 formed on the main 2190 and secondary 2174 winding section housings, respectively, to avoid collisions. The main transformer winding unit is installed on a fixed surface 2192. It is preferably formed as a continuous load bearing device or a molding, filling and sealing machine. The bearing surfaces 2220 and 2222 are preferably made of non- The conductive material is formed without interfering with the magnetic coupling of the primary and secondary transformer windings. Also, as shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 is fixed to the mounting frame 2176 via an elastic material 2224 (such as a gas butadiene rubber bushing), and provides a buffer effect β because the primary transformer winding portion A buffer effect is required beyond the primary transformer winding portion, and the bearing surface 2222 associated with the secondary transformer winding portion 2174 abuts and moves beyond the bearing surface 2220 associated with the primary transformer winding portion 219. As shown in Fig. 41B, when the bearing surfaces related to the winding part of the primary and secondary transformers abut, a gap remains between the main part and the effective part of the winding part of the secondary transformer. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, a traditional power supply that can provide a known voltage at a known frequency for sealing operations can be used to determine the output voltage of the power supply and the specific combination of material fabric and sealing claws. Frequency, and these data are available whenever the power supply is turned on. However, due to operating conditions, deterioration of electrical red parts, slight changes in seal jaw fatigue, and local changes in the material fabric, -26- This paper size applies to the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 view (210 χ 297 mm) A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (24) The exact same voltage and frequency applied to each sealing operation may not be ideal. In a preferred embodiment, a smart power supply is used. The smart power supply determines the electrical load of the sealing claw. The resonance frequency when there is material fabric, and then the sealing energy is applied at this resonance frequency. Figure 42 depicts a block diagram of the circuit required to drive a sealing claw according to the present invention. As shown in Figure 42, a smart RF power supply 2250 series Used to supply the excitation signal to the sealing claw during the sealing operation. The smart RF power supply includes a controller 2252 (such as a microprocessor, microcontroller, FPGA, ASIC, or the like), A_C. Device circuit 2254, JL has a sensing circuit 2256.-External input 2260 (such as a signal to inform the smart RF power supply to start) is often used to trigger a sealing operation. In the preferred embodiment By knowing the precise position of various carriages, it can be determined when a specific seal claw is available for one of the position sensing controllers to provide external input 2260. The output of the smart RF power supply 2250 is transmitted to the main transformer Winding section 2262, which can include multiple turns of a first bundle of 48 -3.0-44 hinges 2264 'Secondary transformer winding section 2266 (can contain 48-30-44 hinges of a second bundle of one of multiple turns The closing line 2268) is connected to the sealing claw assembly 2270 by a snap portion of the hinge 2268. The sealing claw chassis 2272 which can be installed with the sealing claw assembly 2270 slides relative to the main transformer winding 2226. The frame travels as shown by arrow 2274. The flexible drum wire 22 68 is connected in parallel with the capacitor 2276 and the sealed sensor 2278. The capacitor 2276 and the sealed sensor 2278 are installed on the sealing claw 2280. Therefore, the flexible hinge 2268 It is preferably a secondary transformer coil. The extension of the hinge line of the winding portion 2266 is connected to the capacitor 2276 and the bifurcated and sealed inductor 2278 at a pair of nodes 2282a and 2282b. In a preferred embodiment, dense-27 -This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

I I I 扣ΰ, I n ϋ ϋ - - - I 1 ^ ϋ I. I ϋ ϋ - I I ^1 - - - - - - —. I n - - I I 9 2 4 A7I I I ΰ, I n ϋ ϋ---I 1 ^ ϋ I. I ϋ ϋ-I I ^ 1------—. I n--I I 9 2 4 A7

封感應器2278包含單圈的48-5-44(48束中各束有5股,各 股包含4 4個AWG線)平坦鉸合線,但亦可如上述包含多圈。 雖然密封感應器(48-5-44)所用之鉸合線束較佳與可繞 引線2268及次級變壓器捲繞部2266(4 8-3 0-44)所用者不同 ’可能對三者均用相同的鉸合線(尤其若採用適當圈數時) 。此情形中,一電容連接跨越該環之單環鉸合線係均可用 於二者’如此降低根據本發明製造密封爪總成所需之接線 組件數。 智慧型電源供應器2250較佳本身能夠自動微調,故以電 負荷所密封材料織物之密封爪2280的共振頻率來施加密封 能量,因此,智慧型電源供應器22 50首先送出較佳介於 1 〇 - 4 0伏特間之一測試訊號、更佳爲涵蓋一頻率範圍之— 2〇伏特寬頻AC訊號。選定測試訊號的頻率範圍,使得在 密封爪正常預期作業頻率的上及下方產生掃瞄,且一較佳 實施例中覆蓋550-900千赫的範圍。智慧型電源供應器接著 經由感測電路2256監測此AC訊號的電流及電壓,並依照這 些測量値來計算精確的共振頻率β —旦智慧型電源供應器 2250決定精確的共振頻率,智慧型電源供應器2250的AC產 生器電路2254係產生一高壓訊號(其較佳在共振蘋率具有 200伏特之峰値),並將其送到包含電容2276及密封感應器 2278之槽電路,如此使得槽電路產生流過密封感應器2278 之一相當大的交流電流。因爲已負荷的槽電路在施用高電 壓密封訊號之前當場決定共振頻率,在已知施用電壓情形 下’一最大能量値傳入待密封的材料織物。因此,藉由首 -28- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} -'戈--------訂--------線! 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ‘购 924 a; 一 B7五、發明說明(26 ) 先當場估計共振頻率然後再發射高電壓密封訊號,自動微 調技術有助於最佳地使用智慧型電源供應器2250 〇但應瞭 解,Nova Star 3H對槽電路之電壓及電流作連續抽樣' ^算 共振頻率、並調整本身以所計算槽電路的共振頻率來輪出 動力’只要Nova Star 3H受到充能以輸出密封電壓,即持續 此現象。 智慧型電源供應器2250的感測電路2256位置較佳極靠近 主要變壓器捲繞郅2262,但這並非絕對需要。一密封作業 起點時,一低功率測試訊號係施加至密封感應器2136,而 如上述在材料織物中引發渦流電流,感測電路2256係感測 供至密封感應器的電流及電壓、並將此資訊送回智慧型電 源供應器2250。智慧型電源供應器使用此資訊以對於負荷 有材料織物的密封感應器計算出共振頻率,智慧型電源供 應器接著以如此算出的共振頻率來輸出一高電壓訊號至密 封感應器,以形成實際密封作業。 一較佳實施例中,智慧型電源供應器225〇爲得自紐約州 思间維爾的亞美力森公司(Amerithem Inc )之N〇va Star 3H的3千瓦RF電源供應器。N〇va Star 3H(其能以515千赫到 1.2百萬赫的頻率範園輸出功率)設有一感測電路板,該感 測電路板在本申請中係安裝鄭近主要變壓器捲繞部2262。 圖43顯示Nova Star 3H作業之邏輯流程圖,首先,步驟23〇〇 中’一觸發訊號輸入至N〇vastar3H。步驟2302中,觸發 訊號使Nova Star 3H内之一第一控制器引發自動微調功能。 步驟2304中’—第二控制器使Nova Star 3的電壓調節器產生 -29- 本紙張尺度適財關規格⑽x297公楚) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、1--------訂---------線 — α n -I— - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 58 9 24 a7 ___B7__ 五、發明說明(27 ) 測試訊號。步驟2306中’ AC產生器輪出測試訊號。步騍 2308中’第二控制器係測量回應測試訊號之電流牽引 (current draw)、並決定材料織物的共振頻率。最後,步驟 2310中’ AC產生器可以共振頻率輸出高電壓訊號,應瞭解 上述範例雖用Nova Star 3H,電源供應器的選擇取決於當前 應用之功率及頻率需求’故可使用以不同頻率提供不同輸 出功率之其他電源供應器。 圖4 4顯示根據本發明之縱密封爪結構2400,結構2400包 含一密封爪總成2402及一縱支撑總成2404,縱密封爪結構 2400的安裝係沿已摺成一織物管2406的一材料織物12形成 一縱密封、且在經由一充填管2407充填之前拉過縱密封爪 結構2400。因此,形成管時,材料織物12在重疊及朝向彼 此之一或兩邊緣2408上習知設有一聚乙晞條、熱啓動黏劑 或類似物。上述橫向密封作業之前、且較佳在充填管2407 的出口端之前,進行縱密封作業。 縱支撑總成2404包括一直立安裝臂樞軸2410,其支撑一 水平安裝臂2412之一第一端’水平安裝臂2412的一第二端 設有可供安裝密封爪結構2402之一安裝框架2414。安裝臂 掘抽2410的構造可使水平安裝臂2412在一水平平面中移動 ,而介於一第一位置(其中密封爪結構2402未接合而密封織 物管2406)與一第二位置(其中密封爪結構係接合織物管 2406以形成一密封)之間。可提供壓力回鑽、電子回铺裝置 及其他特徵,以控制安裝臂樞軸2410。 ‘如圖4 5所示,密封爪總成2402包括裝有至少一電容2422 -30- 本紙張尺度遶用t國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公楚) — — — — — — — — -------—訂if — !線i. * ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 * 458924 五、發明說明(28 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 之一密封爪2420,電容2422係由一對螺栓2423a、2423b及相 對應的墊圈固定至密封爪2420,密封爪總成2402亦包括安 裝在一端子端點之一壓力滾子2424,壓力滚子2424較佳具 有一凹表面以順應織物管2406之概呈圓柱輪廓,且藉由滚 子座2426a、2426b安裝在密封爪總成2402,滚子座426a、 426b本身經由銷2428及具有壓縮彈簧2432a、2432b之螺絲 2430a、243 Ob連接至壓力滾子。最後,密封爪總成設有一 冷卻劑入口 2434及一冷卻劑出口 2436,如圖44所示,可供 水或另一冷卻劑液體經由冷卻劑管線2438、2440流動。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 如熟悉本技藝者瞭解,織物管受到橫向密封之前進行縱 向密封。縱密封爪與用以由軸向相隔間隔形成密封之橫密 封爪不同,縱密封爪進給織物時係連續使用形成一縱向密 封。爲進行本發明之縱向密封,如上述,經由可由鉸合線 構成之可挽引線2442將一電流施加至縱密封爪2420之一密 封感應器。在密封感應器及電容2422形成的内建槽電路中 流動之一 A C電流,係在材料織物的一導電材料中引發一電 流且因此生熱,以啓動織物内之聚乙烯、聚乙烯膠帶、或 熱啓動黏劑。在材料織物的受熱部通過密封爪之後,壓力 滚子2424迫使織物抵住織物管2406内的一扣滚子2444,使 受熱外表面結合形成一密封。扣滚子2444較佳由橡膠、塑 膠、一彈性體或其他順服性材料製造,使其可配合壓力滾 子2424,扣滚子2444安裝在一扣滾子框架2446上,扣滚子 框架2446則安裝在充填管2407上且較佳呈熔接,此配置可 視需要維持或更換扣滚子2444,而不擾亂後備滾子框架 31 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 —458 924 A7 ___B7__五、發明說明(29 ) 2446或充填管2407。 圖46A及46B顯示密封爪2420之分解圖,密封爪2420包括 一侧上具一縱腔2452且另一側具有一縱密封表面2454之一 殼體2450,密封爪亦包括E型核心2456,其較佳由肥粒鐵或 其他適當的高滲透材料構成,且更佳包含彼此堆疊頂上之 數個E型段2458。一密封感應器2460端點係電性連接至端子 2462a ' 2462b,端子2462a、2462b在作業期間連接至電容 24;22以形成密封爪總成2402中之内建槽電路。 一實施例中,縱密封爪2420之密封感應器2460甴1 / 8,,外 徑及1/1 6”内徑之單環銅管所形成。環腳較佳相隔足夠距 離而可在其間插入E型核心的中央脚。鋼管端點連接至冷 卻劑入口 24 3 4及一冷卻劑出口 2436使一冷卻劑流過銅管 2460 ’以在用以進行縱密封時冷卻該裝置。泵裝置(未圖示 )連接至冷卻劑管線2436、243 8以在縱密封作業期間使冷卻 劑流通。 一第二實施例中,縱密封爪2420用之密封感應器2460係 如上述由橫密封爪所用類型之鉸合線所構成。因爲鉸合線 比鋼管件產生顯著較少熱量,可能不需要冷卻劑,即使用 以連績作縱密封亦然。此情形中,可不需要冷卻劑入口、 冷卻劑出口、冷卻劑管線及相關的泵裝置。 不論使用何型感應器2460,感應器2460及E型核心嵌套在 殼體2450的腔2452中且以環氧樹脂2464、塑膠或其他適當 非導電材料所密封。 ‘縱密射爪用之電源供應器可爲上述橫密封爪所用之相同 -------------X ---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂---------線— α- -32- -I— n I n n n ϋ- 本紙張尺錢时關家鮮iCNS)A4^ (210x297-^17 A7 B7 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 五、發明說明(3〇 ) 類型,因此,一較佳實施例中,—第二Nova Star 3H用以對 於縱密封爪提供動力,但因爲織物移動時縱密封爪持續可 動’此第二Nova Star 3H具有不同操作模式。使用縱密封爪 時,第二Nova Star 3H起初將_測試訊號送出以決定共振頻 率、且開始以共振頻率輸出動力。之後,第二Nova Star 3H 連續抽樣第二槽電路之電壓及電流、計算共振頻率、並調 整本身以槽電路所算出的共振頻率來輸出動力,只要在第 二Nova Star 3H受到觸發情形下,即持續此作用。 安裝密封爪70、71,其具有適可在!^8機! 〇中處理的包 裝材料呈完全橫向延伸之一寬度,參照圖1,密封爪7〇、 71安裝方式係往復移向及移離管2〇且相對於移動織物之工 件方向13呈一角度。較佳,安裝密封爪以垂直移離及移向 管20及轨道58、60及滑架的交叉構件1〇〇之最外面,如圖8 的箭頭190所示。圖8顯示本發明滑架之一實施例,該滑架 位於一未接合位置。反之,參照圖8八,密封爪7〇在圖中位 於一接合位置中,密封爪70較佳以約90度之一密封角277 來接合管20。 圖1所示實施例中,包软材料在界定所形成管2〇内壁之 織物表面1 4上設有一層熱塑性材料。當管2 〇自其相對侧往 内加壓時’管内壁崩塌抵住本身且在熱密封位置中提供管 的熱塑性内壁的相鄰部。雖然由密封爪7 〇、7 1所固持,係 由密封爪施熱一段足以將管20的熱塑性内壁14加熱成其熔 化溫度之時間。對於另一段不加熱的時間,爪係施壓以使 熱塑性材料固化並生成一橫向密封46。此段時間中,織物 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填k本頁)The sealed sensor 2278 includes a single loop of 48-5-44 (5 of each of the 48 bundles, each of which contains 4 or 4 AWG wires), a flat hinged wire, but it can also include multiple turns as described above. Although the sealed wiring harness used for the sealed inductor (48-5-44) is preferably different from the one used for the windable lead 2268 and the secondary transformer winding 2266 (4 8-3 0-44), it may be used for all three The same hinge line (especially if the appropriate number of turns is used). In this case, a single-loop hinge wire connected by a capacitor across the ring can be used for both 'so as to reduce the number of wiring components required to manufacture the seal claw assembly according to the present invention. The intelligent power supply 2250 is preferably capable of automatically fine-tuning itself, so the sealing energy is applied at the resonance frequency of the sealing claws 2280 of the fabric sealed by the electrical load. Therefore, the intelligent power supply 22 50 first sends out preferably between 1 〇- One of the 40 volt test signals, more preferably a 20 volt wideband AC signal covering a frequency range. The frequency range of the test signal is selected such that scanning occurs above and below the normal expected operating frequency of the seal claw, and in a preferred embodiment covers the range of 550-900 kHz. The smart power supply then monitors the current and voltage of this AC signal through the sensing circuit 2256, and calculates the accurate resonance frequency β according to these measurements. Once the smart power supply 2250 determines the precise resonance frequency, the smart power supply The AC generator circuit 2254 of the generator 2250 generates a high-voltage signal (which preferably has a peak voltage of 200 volts at the resonance frequency) and sends it to a slot circuit including a capacitor 2276 and a sealed inductor 2278, so that the slot circuit A considerable AC current is generated flowing through one of the sealed inductors 2278. Because the loaded slot circuit determines the resonance frequency on the spot before applying the high voltage sealing signal, under a known application voltage condition, a 'maximum energy' is transmitted to the material fabric to be sealed. Therefore, with the first -28- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 mm) {Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page}-'戈 ------ --Order -------- Line! Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed 'Buy 924a; One B7 V. Invention Description (26) Estimate the resonance frequency on the spot before transmitting high-voltage sealed signals, automatic fine-tuning technology It helps to make the best use of the smart power supply 2250. However, it should be understood that Nova Star 3H continuously samples the voltage and current of the slot circuit. ^ Calculate the resonance frequency and adjust itself to use the calculated resonance frequency of the slot circuit to rotate. Output 'This phenomenon continues as long as the Nova Star 3H is charged to output a sealed voltage. The sensing circuit 2256 of the smart power supply 2250 is preferably located very close to the main transformer winding 2226, but this is not absolutely required. At the beginning of a sealing operation, a low-power test signal is applied to the sealed inductor 2136, and as described above, an eddy current is induced in the material fabric, and the sensing circuit 2256 senses the current and voltage supplied to the sealed inductor, and Information is sent back to the smart power supply 2250. The smart power supply uses this information to calculate the resonance frequency for the sealed inductor loaded with the material fabric. The smart power supply then outputs a high voltage signal to the sealed inductor at the resonance frequency thus calculated to form the actual seal. operation. In a preferred embodiment, the smart power supply 2250 is a 3 kW RF power supply from Nova Star 3H of Amerithem Inc., Symville, NY. Nova Star 3H (which can output power at a frequency range of 515 kHz to 1.2 million Hz) is provided with a sensing circuit board. In this application, Zheng Jin's main transformer winding section 2262 is installed. . Figure 43 shows the logic flow diagram of Nova Star 3H operation. First, a trigger signal is input to Novastar 3H in step 2300. In step 2302, a trigger signal causes one of the first controllers in the Nova Star 3H to trigger an automatic fine-tuning function. In step 2304'—the second controller makes the Nova Star 3 voltage regulator -29- This paper is suitable for financial specifications (x297) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), 1 --- ----- Order --------- Line — α n -I—-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 4 58 9 24 a7 ___B7__ 5. Description of the invention (27) Test signal. In step 2306, the AC generator turns out the test signal. The second controller in step 2308 measures the current draw in response to the test signal and determines the resonant frequency of the material fabric. Finally, in step 2310, 'The AC generator can output high-voltage signals at the resonance frequency. It should be understood that although the above example uses Nova Star 3H, the choice of power supply depends on the power and frequency requirements of the current application', so it can be used to provide different frequencies. Other power supplies with output power. 4 shows a longitudinal seal claw structure 2400 according to the present invention. The structure 2400 includes a seal claw assembly 2402 and a longitudinal support assembly 2404. The installation of the longitudinal seal claw structure 2400 is along a material fabric that has been folded into a fabric tube 2406. 12 forms a longitudinal seal and pulls through the longitudinal seal claw structure 2400 before filling via a filling tube 2407. Therefore, when forming the tube, the material fabric 12 is conventionally provided with a polyethylene strip, a hot start adhesive or the like on the edges 2408 which overlap and face each other. The longitudinal sealing operation is performed before the above-mentioned horizontal sealing operation, and preferably before the exit end of the filling tube 2407. The longitudinal support assembly 2404 includes an upright mounting arm pivot 2410, which supports a first end of a horizontal mounting arm 2412. A second end of the horizontal mounting arm 2412 is provided with a mounting frame 2414 for mounting a sealing claw structure 2402. . The construction of the mounting arm excavator 2410 enables the horizontal mounting arm 2412 to move in a horizontal plane, between a first position (where the sealing claw structure 2402 is not engaged and sealing the fabric tube 2406) and a second position (where the sealing claw The structure engages the fabric tube 2406 to form a seal). Pressure backdrills, electronic backlays, and other features can be provided to control the mounting arm pivot 2410. 'As shown in Figure 4 5, the sealing claw assembly 2402 includes at least one capacitor 2422 -30- This paper is wrapped around the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297) — — — — — — — — -------— Order if —! Line i. * '(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 * 458924 V. Description of the invention (28) (Please read the back on the first Note: Please fill in this page again.) One of the sealing claws 2420, the capacitor 2422 is fixed to the sealing claw 2420 by a pair of bolts 2423a, 2423b and the corresponding washer. The sealing claw assembly 2402 also includes a pressure installed at one end of the terminal. The roller 2424 and the pressure roller 2424 preferably have a concave surface to conform to the generally cylindrical outline of the fabric tube 2406, and are mounted on the sealing claw assembly 2402 by the roller seats 2426a, 2426b, and the roller seats 426a, 426b themselves pass through Pins 2428 and screws 2430a, 243 Ob with compression springs 2432a, 2432b are connected to the pressure rollers. Finally, the seal claw assembly is provided with a coolant inlet 2434 and a coolant outlet 2436, as shown in FIG. 44, for water or another coolant liquid to flow through the coolant lines 2438, 2440. Printed by the Consumer Affairs Agency of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. As those skilled in the art understand, fabric pipes are longitudinally sealed before being horizontally sealed. The longitudinal seal claws are different from the transverse seal claws which are used to form a seal at intervals in the axial direction. The longitudinal seal claws are continuously used to feed a fabric to form a longitudinal seal. In order to perform the longitudinal sealing of the present invention, as described above, a current is applied to one of the hermetically sealed inductors via the pullable lead 2442 which may be composed of a hinge wire. An AC current flowing in the built-in tank circuit formed by the sealed inductor and capacitor 2422 is caused by a current in a conductive material of the material fabric and thus generates heat to activate the polyethylene, polyethylene tape, or Hot start adhesive. After the heated portion of the material fabric passes through the sealing claw, the pressure roller 2424 forces the fabric against a buckle roller 2444 in the fabric tube 2406 to combine the heated outer surfaces to form a seal. The buckle roller 2444 is preferably made of rubber, plastic, an elastomer or other compliant material, so that it can cooperate with the pressure roller 2424. The buckle roller 2444 is mounted on a buckle roller frame 2446, and the buckle roller frame 2446 is Installed on the filling tube 2407 and preferably welded. This configuration can be maintained or replaced as needed with the roller 2444 without disturbing the backup roller frame. 31 Printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs—458 924 A7 ___B7__ Description of the invention (29) 2446 or filling tube 2407. 46A and 46B show exploded views of the sealing claw 2420. The sealing claw 2420 includes a housing 2450 having a longitudinal cavity 2452 on one side and a longitudinal sealing surface 2454 on the other side. The sealing claw also includes an E-shaped core 2456, which It is preferably composed of ferrous iron or other suitable highly permeable material, and more preferably comprises several E-shaped sections 2458 on top of each other. A sealed sensor 2460 is electrically connected to the terminals 2462a '2462b, and the terminals 2462a, 2462b are connected to the capacitor 24; 22 during operation to form a built-in slot circuit in the sealing claw assembly 2402. In one embodiment, the seal sensor 2460 甴 1/8 of the longitudinal seal claw 2420 is formed by a single-ring copper pipe with an outer diameter and an inner diameter of 1/1 6 ″. The ring feet are preferably spaced apart enough to be inserted therebetween. The central leg of the E-core. The steel pipe ends are connected to the coolant inlet 24 3 4 and a coolant outlet 2436 to allow a coolant to flow through the copper pipe 2460 'to cool the device when used for longitudinal sealing. Pump unit (not (Illustrated) is connected to the coolant lines 2436, 2438 to circulate the coolant during the longitudinal sealing operation. In a second embodiment, the seal sensor 2460 for the longitudinal seal claw 2420 is the type used by the transverse seal claw as described above. The hinge line is composed. Because the hinge line generates significantly less heat than steel pipes, coolant may not be needed, even for continuous sealing. In this case, the coolant inlet, coolant outlet, Coolant lines and related pump devices. Regardless of the type of sensor 2460 used, the sensor 2460 and E-type core are nested in the cavity 2452 of the housing 2450 and sealed with epoxy 2464, plastic or other suitable non-conductive material . 'Vertical Dense Claw The power supply can be the same as that of the horizontal sealing claw mentioned above ------------- X ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ----- ---- Line — α- -32- -I— n I nnn ϋ- This paper ruler is used when Guan Jiaxian iCNS) A4 ^ (210x297- ^ 17 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Description of the invention (30) type. Therefore, in a preferred embodiment, the second Nova Star 3H is used to provide power for the longitudinal seal claw, but because the longitudinal seal claw is continuously movable when the fabric moves, this second Nova Star 3H has Different operating modes. When using the longitudinal seal jaw, the second Nova Star 3H initially sends out the _test signal to determine the resonance frequency and starts to output power at the resonance frequency. After that, the second Nova Star 3H continuously samples the voltage and The current, calculates the resonance frequency, and adjusts itself to output power at the resonance frequency calculated by the slot circuit, as long as the second Nova Star 3H is triggered, this effect will continue. Install the sealing claws 70 and 71, which have suitable ^ 8 machine! 〇 Finished the packaging materials One width extending laterally. Referring to FIG. 1, the installation manner of the sealing claws 70 and 71 is to move back and forth toward and away from the tube 20 and at an angle relative to the workpiece direction 13 of the moving fabric. Preferably, the sealing claws are installed to move vertically. Move away from and toward the outermost side of the tube 20 and the rails 58, 60 and the cross member 100 of the carriage, as shown by arrow 190 in Fig. 8. Fig. 8 shows an embodiment of the carriage of the present invention. Unengaged position. Conversely, referring to FIG. 88, the sealing claw 70 is located in an engaging position in the figure, and the sealing claw 70 preferably joins the tube 20 with a sealing angle 277 of about 90 degrees. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 1, a layer of thermoplastic material is provided on the fabric surface 14 which defines the inner wall of the tube 20 formed. When the tube 20 is pressurized inward from its opposite side, the tube's inner wall collapses against itself and provides the adjacent portion of the thermoplastic inner wall of the tube in the heat-sealed position. Although held by the sealing claws 70, 71, the sealing claw is heated for a period of time sufficient to heat the thermoplastic inner wall 14 of the tube 20 to its melting temperature. For another period of non-heating time, the claw system applies pressure to cure the thermoplastic material and create a transverse seal 46. During this time, the fabric (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

I i I I I---訂--------I -33 A7 B7 ^58924 五、發明說明(31 ) 持續不中斷地往前移動通過機器且及熱密封站28,隨後密 封爪70 ' 71移離管20並與之脱離接合。隨時,兩密封爪 7 〇、7 1彼此保持對齊且随管2 0以往前移動的管2 〇等速移 過熱密封站28。圖示實施例中’管20橫向切斷且位於所形 成的密封46邊界内,將管分成各別充填及密封的包裝34。 特別參照圖2 - 4 ’本發明的一熱密封次總成4 8之實施例 包括一架72。所示的架分別包含第一、第二、第三卵形概 呈平面狀之架構件74、76、78,其彼此平行對準但彼此呈 相隔。固定部及相連桿80、82、84、86或類似物使三架 構件對彼此剛性固定。 如圖2及4所示,第一架構件74配置於架72之一第一侧最 外部、且對於沿此架構件74内面96的外周邊界94配置之一 第一轨道58作爲安裝位置。第二架構件76配置於架72的一 第二侧最外部、且對於大致等於第一軌道5 8但爲其鏡像之 —第二軌道60作爲安裝位置。第二軌道60安裝在第二架構 件76之内面98周邊界97上。 第一及第二軌道58、60界定圖3及11A箭頭99所示之一閉 合卵形路徑,一滑架52可沿該路徑行進〇較佳具有在織物 1 2上進行不同作業且配置於織物1 2相對側上之至少兩個獨 特滑架類型。滑架不同型構造及結構雖然大致類似,略有 設計變化以容納各型滑架之獨特作業。譬如,較佳實施例 中,切割滑架5 2具有一刀203以進行一切割作業,且密封滑 架53具有一動力介面以提供能量進行一密封作業。並且, 第二次總成的密封滑架5 3之長形密封爪7 1設有一中央定位 -34 - 本紙張尺錢用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I —---^ — 1— 訂·--------線 — _ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 4 4 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(32 ) 槽,其沿密封爪長度延伸至適當位置,以在刀的切緣已切 .斷在兩個次總成對齊的密封爪之間的管之後,將刀的切綠 收納在此槽内。相似的滑架較佳在相同密封次總成上行造, 使得切割滑架5 2及密封滑架5 3位於移動織物1 2相對側上。 滑架52、53包括至少一工具,其構造可在移動織物12上 進行至少部份的包裝作業《可用的示範工具包括:密封器 '切具、及容積控制器。但本發明不限於此且可包括能在 織物進行其他作業之工具,較佳,多數工具安裝至滑架、 或與之相關。 參照圖4及7,滑架5 2包括跨越第一及第二軌道之間分離 距離之一交叉構件100(亦見圖8);且包括一第一平面狀腳 102,係自滑架的一第一端1〇3對靠至第一軌道58 ;及一第 一平面狀腳128 ’其對靠至第二軌道60。如圖8及11A所示 ,此第一平面狀腳102之外面104設有一第一组輪1〇6及108 ,各輪可旋轉式安裝在一安裝板114上,此安裝板可由安 裝在腳102外面104之一銷116作中央樞轉,使得輪106及108 可沿以樞銷116作爲軌跡之一拱部作搖擺,進一步提供揠設 在脚102面104上且藉由一第二安裝板122鄰近第一組輪之一 概呈相似的第二組輪118、120。一第二樞銷124將第二安裝 板樞設至與第一安裝板的榧销II6相鄭且分離之第一腳 面’此第二組的輪118、120可在以第二樞銷124作爲軌跡之 一拱部作搖擺,因此,第一及第二安裝板114、122可對彼 此極轉’如圖11Α所示。 •並且,滑架之第二及相對端105包括一類似的平面狀腳 -35· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ^一^ !!1 訂,! 線— α A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ---------- 五、發明說明(33 ) ία、且對靠至軌道5 8。如圖8所示,此第二腳128的外面 ISO裝有第二及第四組的輪1S2、135、136(第四輪未顯示), 其各別結構及安裝係與第一及第二組輪的結構及安裝係大 致相同。 如圖2、4、5、11A所示,各軌道(譬如軌道58)包括分別 沿軌道5 8相對外緣界定之最外及最内轨14〇、ι42。各此轨 140係由軌道5 8侧緣之—個雙截角141所界定,第—、第二 、第二及第四組輪的各輪包含與軌道相鄰延伸之侧向壁, 以限制相對的侧向移動。如圖8所示,各輪設有輪的外圓周 中之一“V”槽143,此槽的幾何结構可使輪收納一軌道之一 軌。“V”型槽雖爲—較佳實施例,亦可根據本發明採用其 他形狀之槽。 另一實施例中,侧向壁呈彎曲、但延伸至比沿軌道滚動 的一輪部份更大之直徑。至於“V”槽143,側向壁較佳徑向 延伸超過輪與轨道之間的接觸點,其他輪實施例具有單側 向壁,至少一輪在一或多軌道的—相對侧上具有—侧向壁 ,以防止在相對侧向之移動。另外,一組輪可直接附接至 滑架體部或可安裝在自軌道體部延伸之單腳。 如圖4及11Α所示,係安裝各组輪的一輪以沿—各別軌道 的最内轨移動’且安裝各組輪的其他輪以沿—各別軌道的 最外軌移動,此方式中,滑架固定安裝在軌道上以沿軌道 移動,各軌道之第一及第二軌係沿其各別軌道全長2彼此 均勻相隔。圖1-6及11Α中,軌道在圖中位於界定路徑”之 -·閉迴路中。如圖11Α所示,係安裝各多數滑架(亦即滑架 -36- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --¾ n I ϋ ϋ ϋ I n I I n I I n I n n n - - ί— ϋ n u n _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 297公釐) 4 5qQ24I i II I --- Order -------- I -33 A7 B7 ^ 58924 V. Description of the invention (31) Continuously move forward through the machine without interruption and the heat sealing station 28, then the sealing claw 70 '71 moves away from the tube 20 and disengages it. At any time, the two sealing claws 70 and 71 are aligned with each other and the pipe 200, which has been moved before the pipe 20, moves past the heat sealing station 28 at a constant speed. In the illustrated embodiment, the 'tube 20 is cut transversely and lies within the boundary of the seal 46 formed, and the tube is divided into individual filled and sealed packages 34. With particular reference to Figures 2-4 'an embodiment of a heat-sealed subassembly 48 of the present invention includes a frame 72. The illustrated frame includes first, second, and third oval frame members 74, 76, 78, which are aligned parallel to each other but spaced apart from each other. The fixing portion and the connecting rods 80, 82, 84, 86 or the like make the three frame members rigidly fixed to each other. As shown in Figs. 2 and 4, the first frame member 74 is disposed at the outermost side of a first side of one of the frames 72, and a first rail 58 is disposed as an installation position for an outer peripheral boundary 94 along the inner surface 96 of the frame member 74. The second frame member 76 is disposed on the outermost side of a second side of the frame 72 and is a mounting position for a second rail 60 that is substantially equal to the first rail 58 but mirrors it. The second rail 60 is mounted on the inner surface 98 of the second frame member 76 on the boundary 97. The first and second rails 58 and 60 define one of the closed oval paths shown by arrows 99 in FIGS. 3 and 11A, and a carriage 52 can travel along this path. Preferably, it has different operations on the fabric 12 and is arranged on the fabric. 1 2 at least two unique carriage types on opposite sides. Although the different structures and structures of the carriages are roughly similar, there are slight design changes to accommodate the unique operations of various types of carriages. For example, in the preferred embodiment, the cutting carriage 52 has a knife 203 to perform a cutting operation, and the sealing carriage 53 has a power interface to provide energy for a sealing operation. In addition, the long sealing claw 7 1 of the sealing carriage 5 3 of the second assembly is provided with a central positioning -34-This paper uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) I —--- ^ — 1— Order · -------- Line — _ Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs for Consumer Cooperation Du 4 4 Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative Fifth, invention description (32) The slot extends along the length of the sealing claw to the appropriate position so that the cutting edge of the knife has been cut. The tube between the sealing claws aligned between the two sub-assemblies is broken. After that, the cut green of the knife is stored in this groove. Similar carriages are preferably constructed on the same sealing sub-assembly so that the cutting carriage 5 2 and the sealing carriage 5 3 are located on opposite sides of the moving fabric 12. The carriages 52, 53 include at least one tool that is configured to perform at least part of the packaging operation on the moving fabric 12. "Available example tools include: sealers, cutters, and volume controllers. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may include a tool capable of performing other operations on the fabric. Preferably, most tools are mounted to or related to the carriage. 4 and 7, the carriage 52 includes a cross member 100 (see also FIG. 8) that spans the separation distance between the first and second tracks; and includes a first planar foot 102, which is a part of the carriage. The first end 103 is paired to the first track 58; and a first planar leg 128 'is paired to the second track 60. As shown in Figs. 8 and 11A, a first set of wheels 106 and 108 are provided on the outer surface 104 of the first flat leg 102, and each wheel is rotatably mounted on a mounting plate 114, which can be mounted on the leg One of the pins 116 on the outside 104 is pivoted centrally, so that the wheels 106 and 108 can swing along the arch with the pivot pin 116 as a trajectory, and further provided on the surface 102 of the foot 102 through a second mounting plate. 122 is similar to one of the first set of wheels 118, 120 similar to the second set of wheels. A second pivot pin 124 pivots the second mounting plate to a first foot surface that is aligned with and separated from the pin II6 of the first mounting plate. The wheels 118 and 120 of this second group can be One of the trajectories is swayed, so that the first and second mounting plates 114 and 122 can be turned to each other 'as shown in FIG. 11A. • Also, the second and opposite end 105 of the carriage includes a similar flat foot -35. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back first) Fill out this page) ^ 一 ^ !! 1 Order! Line — α A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ---------- V. Description of the invention (33) ία, and leaning to track 5 8. As shown in FIG. 8, the ISO of the second leg 128 is equipped with wheels 2S2, 135, and 136 of the second and fourth groups (the fourth wheel is not shown), and its respective structure and installation are the same as those of the first and second wheels. The structure and installation of the group wheel are roughly the same. As shown in Figs. 2, 4, 5, and 11A, each track (for example, track 58) includes the outermost and innermost tracks 14 and 42 respectively defined along the relative outer edges of the tracks 58. Each of these rails 140 is defined by a double truncation angle 141 of the side edges of the rails 58. Each of the first, second, second, and fourth sets of wheels includes lateral walls extending adjacent to the rails to limit Relative lateral movement. As shown in Fig. 8, each wheel is provided with one "V" groove 143 in the outer circumference of the wheel, and the geometry of this groove allows the wheel to accommodate one track of one track. Although the "V" groove is a preferred embodiment, grooves of other shapes may be used in accordance with the present invention. In another embodiment, the lateral wall is curved but extends to a larger diameter than the portion of the wheel rolling along the track. As for the "V" groove 143, the side wall preferably extends radially beyond the contact point between the wheel and the track. Other wheel embodiments have a single side wall, and at least one wheel has one side on the -opposite side of one or more tracks Towards the wall to prevent movement on the opposite side. Alternatively, a set of wheels can be attached directly to the carriage body or can be mounted on a single leg extending from the track body. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 11A, one wheel of each set of wheels is installed to move along—the innermost track of the respective track 'and the other wheels of each set of wheels are installed to move along—the outermost track of the respective track. The carriage is fixedly installed on the track to move along the track, and the first and second tracks of each track are evenly spaced from each other along the entire length 2 of each track. In Figures 1-6 and 11A, the track is located in the closed loop of the defined path in the figure.-As shown in Figure 11A, most of the carriages (that is, carriages -36-) are installed (please read the notes on the back first) Please fill in this page for more information) --¾ n I ϋ ϋ ϋ I n II n II n I nnn--ί— ϋ nun _ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇297 mm) 4 5qQ24

五、發明說明(34 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 5 2、15〇、152、154)以沿軌道移動。 如圖1 1 A所示,滑架可藉由樞設輪組而樞設在軌道上。 由於一滑架進入並通過一軌道彎段,各腳1〇2及128上之各 輪組係沿其各樞銷116、124樞轉,以容納軌140的曲率半徑 Γ2相對於軌142的曲率半徑Γ t之差異,故滑架方向大致垂直 於軌道的長度尺寸。因此,滑架磁鐵及軌道相關的對準線 圈係達成最大之所需對準,故造成一滑架磁鐵與相對準線 圈之間的最大電磁耦合,亦造成在滑架沿軌道的位置上可 經歷之最大可控制性(特別是在軌道中的線性段轉換成軌道 的一彎段之部份内)。 較佳,軌道5 8、6 0爲自動潤滑式,圖11A及11B顯示一較 佳潤滑系統,此系統中,軌道5 8在相對軌140、142上設有 排濕孔1540,以供一潤滑劑(較佳爲油)自潤滑劑供源432傳 送通過至轨道軌140、142,而對軌道提供潤滑並使滑架沿 電路30更平順行進。排濕孔1540較佳與沿潤滑劑流動之一 通路1541相連接,排濕孔較佳往軌道頂配置、而使重力幫 助潤滑劑沿軌道流通,一泵430係與排濕孔1540呈流體相聯 ,以自潤滑劑供源432泵輸潤滑劑、並通過通路1541前往軌 道5 8外部。 可配合潤滑使用一眞空系統,以移除在軌道上累積之任 何潤滑劑,參照圖11A及11B,一眞空泵434在圖中與眞空孔 1542相連接,眞空孔1542在圖中設在軌道58底部,但可沿 軌道5 8位於任何位置。眞空孔1542亦配置在相對軌140、 142上,且,滑架較佳設有油擦拭刷1546,以幫助潤滑劑沿 -37- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) in —--— — — — — — — -------I ^«—— — 1— — — I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 0 B— ^1 - ;:;〇3 924 A7 B7 五、發明說明(35 ) 軌道流通並防止累積潤滑劑。較佳,刷1546位於輪之間並 承載接觸轨道。刷1546較佳由一氈料製造,但亦可用能夠 吸收及傳送潤滑劑之任何適當材料。 參照圖2-5及圖7’第三架構件78係配置在第一及第二架 構件74、76之間、與之對準、及與之相隔。此第三架構件 對於多數導電線圈160(主動元件)作爲安裝位置,導電線圈 160彼此電性絕緣且沿第三架構件7 8外周邊界162併排彼此 對準,這些對準的線圈大致與第一及第二軌道爲一體,使 得沿軌道移動的一滑架係順應與對準的線圏16〇成一體之_ 路徨,線圈較佳包覆在一環氧樹脂或其他包覆材料内,以 免對於元件之不良暴露。線圈較佳作爲線性馬達之主動元 件,這些線圈當充能時係沿軌道運送滑架。 熟悉本技藝者暸解可視應用所需方式採用其他架構造, 而不犧牲架的功能性質。除了上述架功能之外,亦作爲一 種用以將系統安裝在既有製造機之超結構上或獨立支撑結 構(如地板)之裝置。 參照圖7及8,滑架52的交叉構件100藉由其一腳164安裝 在其内面166上’具有其另一腳170之一“L”型框架168係自 架往内倚靠且面對相對準的線圈160。一長形磁鐵174固定 在面對線圈之腳170表面172上,磁鐵位置鄰近相對準線圈 160外面176並與之相隔,此位置中,當線圈受啓動且供應 電能時,在一線圈或一部份線圈的電磁場影響球狀範圍内 之磁鐵174係適於沿周圍發展一電磁場。 •此方式中,本發明提供在線圈與磁鐵之間建立及繼續最 -38- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填反本頁) -_ '晨------- 訂------- 線| 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製V. Description of the invention (34) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (5, 2, 50, 152, 154) to move along the track. As shown in FIG. 1A, the carriage can be pivoted on the track by pivoting a wheel set. As a carriage enters and passes through a track bend, each wheel set on each foot 102 and 128 pivots along its pivot pins 116, 124 to accommodate the curvature radius Γ2 of rail 140 relative to the curvature of rail 142 The difference in the radius Γ t makes the carriage direction approximately perpendicular to the length of the track. Therefore, the carriage magnet and track-related alignment coils achieve the maximum required alignment, which results in the maximum electromagnetic coupling between a carriage magnet and a relative quasi-coil, and also results in the carriage being able to experience the position along the track. Maximum controllability (especially in the part where a linear segment in a track is transformed into a curved part of the track). Preferably, the tracks 5 8 and 60 are automatically lubricated. Figures 11A and 11B show a preferred lubrication system. In this system, the track 5 8 is provided with a drainage hole 1540 on the opposite tracks 140 and 142 for lubrication. Agent (preferably oil) is transmitted from the lubricant supply source 432 to the track rails 140, 142 to provide lubrication to the track and make the carriage travel more smoothly along the circuit 30. The moisture drain hole 1540 is preferably connected to a path 1541 along the lubricant flow. The moisture drain hole is preferably arranged to the top of the track to allow gravity to help the lubricant flow along the track. A pump 430 is in fluid phase with the moisture drain hole 1540. It pumps lubricant from the lubricant supply source 432 and goes to the outside of the track 5 8 through the passage 1541. An emptying system can be used with lubrication to remove any lubricant accumulated on the track. Referring to FIGS. 11A and 11B, an emptying pump 434 is connected to the emptying hole 1542 in the figure, and the emptying hole 1542 is provided on the track 58 in the figure. Bottom, but can be located anywhere along the track 5-8. The hollow hole 1542 is also arranged on the opposite rails 140 and 142. The carriage is preferably provided with an oil wiping brush 1546 to help the lubricant along -37- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Mm) in —---- — — — — — — — --- I ^ «—— — 1— — — I (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 0 B— ^ 1 -;:; 〇3 924 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (35) Orbital circulation and prevent accumulation of lubricant. Preferably, the brush 1546 is located between the wheels and carries a contact track. The brush 1546 is preferably made of a felt, but any suitable material capable of absorbing and transmitting lubricant may be used. Referring to Figs. 2-5 and Fig. 7 ', the third frame member 78 is disposed between, aligned with, and spaced apart from the first and second frame members 74, 76. This third frame member is used as a mounting position for most of the conductive coils 160 (active components). The conductive coils 160 are electrically insulated from each other and aligned side by side along the outer peripheral boundary 162 of the third frame member. These aligned coils are roughly aligned with the first And the second track as a whole, so that a carriage moving along the track conforms to the aligned line 圏 160. 徨 徨, the coil is preferably wrapped in an epoxy resin or other coating material to avoid For poor exposure of components. The coils are preferably active components of a linear motor, and these coils transport the carriage along the track when charged. Those skilled in the art understand the way required for visual applications using other rack constructions without sacrificing the functional nature of the rack. In addition to the above-mentioned rack functions, it also serves as a device for mounting the system on the superstructure of an existing manufacturing machine or an independent support structure (such as a floor). Referring to FIGS. 7 and 8, the cross member 100 of the carriage 52 is mounted on its inner surface 166 by one leg 164 of which “L” -shaped frame 168 having one of its other legs 170 leans inward from the rack and faces oppositely.准 的 空气 160。 The prospective coil 160. An elongated magnet 174 is fixed on the surface 172 of the leg 170 facing the coil, and the magnet is located adjacent to and spaced from the outer side 176 of the quasi-coil 160. In this position, when the coil is activated and supplies electrical energy, a coil or a coil The electromagnetic field of the partial coil affects the magnet 174 in the spherical range, which is suitable for developing an electromagnetic field along the periphery. • In this method, the present invention provides the establishment and continuity between the coil and the magnet. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (Reverse page) -_ 'Morning ------- Order ------- Line | Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

五、發明說明(36 ) 大化之操作距離’本發明亦建立在沿轨道長度所有位置處 對磁鐵相對線圈的方向關係之一連續最大化,本發明的此 型態係加強系統操作效率。尤其此將導致已知滑架對於軌 道及可進行任何時間及位置變化的強化速度之時間及位置 關係的有規律變化以及其他優點。應瞭解上述相對線圈雖 爲“L”型框架,亦可用其他形狀α 參照圖7,一框架182安裝在滑架52腳102末端178上,框 架182承载一制動墊180,制動墊180面對裝在架構件74内面 上之一制動板183,制動板183安裝在延伸過架構件74厚度 之一制動缸184上、JL位置接合一電磁開關ι88或適合將制 動板移入及移出與制動墊180接合之其他裝置。制動墊ι80 係用以使滑架沿其轨道5 8及60選擇性停止移動。 如圖8所示,安裝密封爪70以往復狀垂直移向及移離滑 架的交又構件100最外面(請見圖8之箭頭190),藉由可滑式 安裝在開口 196及198中通過一刀載具200厚度之第一及第二 样192及194使密封爪7 0移動。刀載具200包括一中央交叉臂 201,譬如以螺絲205、2 0 7將一刀2〇3可移除式固定至—中 央交叉臂201。中央交叉臂的各端係界定一侧向延伸部213 、215,其各包括分別在架往内延伸並終止於一侧向凸耳 221、223之一腳217、219。各凸耳221、223設有可滑式收納 一各別桿192、194之一通口 225、227,桿192進一步由安裝 凸耳202及204固定在相對交叉構件1〇〇之位置中,凸耳2〇2 及204自倚靠交叉構件100的一腳210内面209突出。以類似 方式,桿194由安裝凸耳2 06、208固定在對於交叉構件1〇〇 -39- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ί請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ----訂---------線! 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 458 924 五、發明說明(37 ) 之位置中,凸耳206、208自倚靠交叉構件100的一腳212面 214突出。 如圖8所示,各桿192、194係可滑式收納在其各安裝Λ耳 202、204、206、208之内,故密封爪70可移離或移向交又 構件100。交叉構件100固定至腳102 ' 128、且相對於軌道 5 8、6 0的侧向移動由輪组所限制。 如圖8所示,桿的内侧端216、218終止於各腳内裝有凸輪 從動件224、226之一各軛220、222上。桿192進一步設有一 包園螺旋彈簧228,其具有支撑抵住軛220之一端230及其支 撑抵住凸耳202内側面236之相對端234。藉由此彈簧,桿係 自架往内及遠離滑架的交叉構件之一方向中呈偏壓。在凸 耳204及腳217上之凸耳221内侧面之間以包圍關係對於該桿 提供另一螺旋彈簧240。因此,此彈簧將刀載具200在架往 内及遠離交叉構件1〇〇方向中呈偏壓,故使刀203往其縮回 儲存位置偏壓,如圖8的虚線所示。 藉由第一桿相似的安裝凸耳206、208及彈簧241及229來安 裝第二桿194,安裝第二桿之凸耳及彈簧係對其安裝在第— 样的相對應部份概呈鏡像,因此,第一及第二桿的作用係 安裝密封爪的相對端250及252,以使密封爪相對滑架的交 叉構件作直線往復移動。安裝方式使密封爪的相對端等距 移往或移離交又構件,使得密封爪外面254以均勻壓力在密 封爪面長度上接合—充填管。 可瞭解,圖7 ' 8、8a所示的滑架52包括設在具一切緣256 經甴位於密封爪中央的一槽258(亦見圖4)突出密封爪7〇外 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填t本頁) ----—II--訂----! > 線 — α 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -40- A7 B7 五、發明說明(38 ) 面254位置之一平面狀刀2〇3。刀2〇3係用以切斷由密封爪接 合且固持在密封爪7〇及另一密封爪71之間的管2〇,如圖1 及9所tf。因此’刀203較佳爲平面刃形式,其圖8所示以螺 絲2〇5、207將一第一端260固定至刀載具200。刃係從刀載 具往外延伸、且可滑式通過設在一滑样262長度尺寸中央且 隨之定向的一槽258’在密封爪70長度尺寸中央處(且隨之 定向)設有另一槽264(見圖4)。 當刀載具往外及離開滑架之方向移動時,可使刃256滑過 槽258、264並自密封爪7 0的外侧面254將其切緣256突出以 切斷管2 0。藉由刀切緣相對密封桿外側面中央位置之緣故 ’在密封爪形成的密封邊界内切斷該管(較佳在長形橫向密 封的侧緣之間中央處)β如圖1及9所示,密封爪7 0係與安 裝在滑架53上的另一密封爪71相對齊,—槽(未圖示)設在 密封爪71長度尺寸中央處並隨之延伸,以在此切緣已通過 這些密封爪間所困住之一管上形成的一密封厚度之後,收 納刀203的切緣256。 參照圖8,刀203係包括可由刀載具200滑架之相對移動而 自密封爪70外面254突出之一切緣256,此實施例中,切緣 256呈直線狀,但可另爲鋸齒狀或有其他形狀以改善切割。 切緣256較佳相對面254呈一角度配置,較佳,切緣256係相 對管2 0部份及相對面254呈某角度以作切割。 參照圖8 A ’切緣256在圖中相對管2〇或相對密封爪前面 呈一入射角度配置,而接合該管。一斜角緣有助於降低管 切斷所需之切力。因爲刀的角度使少部份切緣256在任何時 -41- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) .,農-------- 訂 i -- -----線—. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458924V. Description of the invention (36) Increased operating distance ′ The present invention is also established to continuously maximize one of the directional relationships of the magnets to the coils at all positions along the track length. This form of the invention enhances the system's operating efficiency. In particular, this will lead to regular changes in the time and positional relationship of the known carriage to the track and the speed at which any time and position change can be performed, and other advantages. It should be understood that although the above-mentioned relative coil is an “L” -shaped frame, other shapes α can also be used. Referring to FIG. 7, a frame 182 is mounted on the end 178 of the foot 102 of the carriage 52, and the frame 182 carries a brake pad 180. A brake plate 183 on the inner surface of the frame member 74. The brake plate 183 is installed on a brake cylinder 184 that extends through the thickness of the frame member 74, and an electromagnetic switch 88 is connected to the JL position, or it is suitable to move the brake plate in and out to engage the brake pad 180. Other devices. The brake pad 80 is used to selectively stop the carriage along its tracks 5 8 and 60. As shown in FIG. 8, the mounting sealing claw 70 is vertically reciprocated toward and away from the outermost part of the cross member 100 of the carriage (see arrow 190 in FIG. 8), and is slidably installed in the openings 196 and 198. The sealing claw 70 is moved by the first and second patterns 192 and 194 of a knife carrier 200 thickness. The knife carrier 200 includes a central cross arm 201, for example, a knife 203 can be removably fixed to the central cross arm 201 with screws 205, 207. Each end of the central cross arm defines a lateral extension 213, 215, each of which includes a leg 217, 219 that extends inwardly of the frame and terminates in a lateral lug 221, 223, respectively. Each lug 221, 223 is provided with a sliding port 225, 227, which is one of the respective rods 192, 194. The rod 192 is further fixed by the mounting lugs 202 and 204 in the position of the opposite cross member 100. The lugs 202 and 204 protrude from the inner surface 209 of one leg 210 leaning against the cross member 100. In a similar manner, the rod 194 is fixed by mounting lugs 2 06, 208 on the cross member 100-39- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ί Please read the back first Please note this page and fill in this page) ---- Order --------- Online! Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 458 924 V. In the position of the invention description (37), the lugs 206, 208 protrude from the 212 side 214 of one leg of the cross member 100. As shown in FIG. 8, each of the rods 192 and 194 is slidably received in each of its mounting ears 202, 204, 206, and 208. Therefore, the sealing claw 70 can be moved away from or toward the cross member 100. The cross member 100 is fixed to the feet 102 '128 and the lateral movement relative to the tracks 5 8, 60 is restricted by the wheel set. As shown in Fig. 8, the inner ends 216, 218 of the lever terminate in yokes 220, 222, one of which is provided with cam followers 224, 226 in each foot. The rod 192 is further provided with a wrap-around coil spring 228 having an end 230 supported against one end 230 of the yoke 220 and an opposite end 234 supported against the inner side surface 236 of the lug 202. By this spring, the rod system is biased in one direction of the cross member from the rack inward and away from the carriage. Between the inner side of the lug 204 and the lug 221 on the foot 217, another coil spring 240 is provided for the rod in a surrounding relationship. Therefore, this spring biases the knife carrier 200 in the rack inward and 100 directions away from the cross member, so the knife 203 is biased toward its retracted storage position, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 8. The second rod 194 is installed by the similar mounting lugs 206 and 208 of the first rod and the springs 241 and 229, and the lugs and springs of the second rod are mounted on the first corresponding part of the first mirror. Therefore, the action of the first and second rods is to install the opposite ends 250 and 252 of the sealing claws so that the sealing claws reciprocate linearly with respect to the cross member of the carriage. The installation mode makes the opposite ends of the sealing claws move equidistantly toward or away from the intersection member, so that the outer surface 254 of the sealing claws joins with the filling claws over the length of the sealing claw surface with uniform pressure. It can be understood that the slide frame 52 shown in FIGS. 7 ′ 8 and 8 a includes a groove 258 (see also FIG. 4) provided with a flange 256 at the center of the sealing claw and protruding beyond the sealing claw 70 (please read the back Note this page and fill in this page) ----— II--Order ----! > Line — α Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -40- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (38) One of the plane 254 plane-shaped knives 203. The knife 203 is used to cut the tube 20 which is connected by the sealing claw and is held between the sealing claw 70 and the other sealing claw 71, as shown in tf in Figs. Therefore, the 'knife 203 is preferably in the form of a flat blade, and as shown in FIG. 8, a first end 260 is fixed to the knife carrier 200 with screws 205 and 207. The blade system extends outward from the knife carrier and can slide through a slot 258 ′ provided in the center of a slide 262 length dimension and then oriented at the center of the length of the seal claw 70 (and then oriented). Slot 264 (see Figure 4). When the knife carrier is moved outward and away from the carriage, the blade 256 can be slid through the grooves 258, 264 and the cutting edge 256 protruding from the outer side 254 of the sealing claw 70 to cut the tube 20. By cutting the edge relative to the central position of the outer side of the sealing rod, the tube is cut off within the sealing boundary formed by the sealing claws (preferably at the center between the side edges of the elongated transverse seal) β as shown in Figures 1 and 9 It is shown that the sealing claw 70 is aligned with another sealing claw 71 mounted on the carriage 53. A groove (not shown) is provided at the center of the length dimension of the sealing claw 71 and extends accordingly, so that the cut edge After passing through a sealing thickness formed on a tube trapped between the sealing claws, the cutting edge 256 of the knife 203 is received. Referring to FIG. 8, the knife 203 includes all edges 256 protruding from the outside 254 of the sealing claw 70 by the relative movement of the carriage of the knife carrier 200. In this embodiment, the cutting edge 256 is straight, but may be another zigzag or There are other shapes to improve cutting. The cutting edge 256 is preferably arranged at an angle with respect to the surface 254. Preferably, the cutting edge 256 is at an angle with respect to the part 20 of the tube and the opposite surface 254 for cutting. Referring to Fig. 8A ', the cutting edge 256 is arranged at an angle of incidence with respect to the tube 20 or the front of the sealing claw in the figure to engage the tube. A beveled edge helps reduce the shear required to cut the tube. Because of the angle of the knife, a small portion of the cutting edge 256 is at any time -41- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note f on the back before filling this page) ., Agriculture -------- Order i------ Line —. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458924

五、發明說明(39 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 刻接觸工件而切割織物1 2,且因爲可逐漸在織物上作切割 ’可比非斜角刀更低之力量有效率地切割管2 〇。另外,刀 可有與管2 0平行之一切緣。較佳,切緣256的角度279爲銳 角’角度279更佳約3至20度、最佳約5至1〇度。另外,切 緣256中不與密封爪70外面254平行、且與管20成切線之部 份可能並非直線狀。 現參照圖8Β - 8D ’刀203之第一實施例包含一概呈平面狀 刀,一概呈平面狀頂表面370與一概呈平面狀底表面372係 相隔而界定刃厚度Τ。較佳,刀有概呈均勻狀厚度τ,但厚 度可改變。較佳,刃厚度Τ較佳介於約〇 2至3公厘之間、 更佳介於約0 · 5至1 . 5公厘之間、最佳約!公厘。刃在一端 具有一切緣256 ’及較佳設於相對端之一安裝部374以將刀 固定至一引動器。安裝部374較佳包括孔375以使螺絲裝設 通過,但亦可用其他適當的安裝裝置。 侧緣376自安裝緣垂直延伸至切緣256且較佳彼此平行, 使刀具有一矩形。另外,刀可有適合將刀裝在一引動器裝 置之任何形狀,譬如,刃可有一背部255以安裝在一引動器 、及一前部257以進行切割作業,且背部255可比前部257更 窄〇 切緣256在圖中爲直線狀,但另可爲鋸齒狀或其他形狀以 改善切割。譬如,如下文詳述,切緣可爲弓形或可包含多 數直緣及適合切割的多種其他幾何結構。較佳,切緣256爲 歪斜狀且包括相對底表面372呈斜角之至少一切割表面。如 ST8B所示,刀203較佳具有一第一切割表面259及一第二 切 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填t本頁) — II 訂·!'線! -H ^1 1 n It I t I 1· I I I i I l n .1 I - 45^924五、發明說明(40 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印裝 割表面261,切割表面259、261較佳呈平面狀,但可爲鋸齒 狀或其他非+面幾何㈣。第-切割表面259位置朝向切緣 256尖端、並相對底表面372呈一角度377。第二切割表面 位置鄰近第一切割表面259、並更加遠離切緣256尖端、 且相對底表面372呈一角度378。角度377及378較佳爲銳角 且較佳角度377大於角度378。角度377較佳介於約1〇至2〇 度之間、角378更佳介於約〇至度之間6 刀2〇3較佳由一非金屬材料製造(如陶瓷),且較佳刀2〇3 由一非導電材料製造,五較佳刀203由具有小顆粒邊界尺寸 之一材料製造。較佳,顆粒邊界尺寸小於不鏽鋼。更佳, 顆粒邊界尺寸平均小於約1微米、更佳平均小於〇6微米、 最佳平均小於〇 5微米。較佳,刀203由一陶瓷材料製造, 較佳材料包括一結氧化物(如二氧化锆),但亦可用其他材 料(譬如氧化鋁及碳化矽)。二氧化锆因爲大多數的酸無法 參蚀而很有利,因此’較佳的刀2〇3能夠抵抗食物(尤其果 汁及牛奶)中常見之酸所侵蝕,而能在酸性環境時抗蝕(譬 如當切斷注有譬如各種常含檸檬酸等各種有機酸之果汁等 酸液的管時)^並且’因爲顆粒邊界尺寸小於常見的不鏽鋼 刀,故較少侵蝕性元件(如上述酸液)進入顆粒邊界内以侵 蚀該刃,因此,切緣256能夠保留尖銳較久時間、因而可使 用較長時間及循環。 刀的額外實施例顯示於圖8 E - 8 Η中,這些實施例包括非 直線切緣,這些實施例中,切緣的幾何構造較佳在管2 〇橫 向對於刀中心呈對稱狀,以此方式,刀可接合管並在工件 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填系本頁) --------訂---------線· α -43- 本紙張尺度適用中Ϊ5家標準(CNS)A4現格(210 X 297公釐)~~ A7 B7 ’.’458924 五、發明說明(41 ) 上施加一橫向對稱平衡切力,以降低或消除因切力而在_ 橫向中使工件偏壓之傾向。 參照圖8 E,刀2〇3的實施例包括一鋸齒狀切緣379。 圖8F描述刀203之另一實施例,其包括超過一直緣界定之 一切緣38〇,此實施例中,直緣381及382以一角度383在一 峰部386上相遇,較佳,角度383呈鈍角,角度383更佳介於 約160至180度之間,刀203的此實施例在圖中爲一包裝環境 且配置於密封爪70中央。密封爪70在圖中與密封爪71及接 合管20對齊。圖8F-8H中’管20包含摺在本身上的織物12 以界定一個三層部(圖中相對密封爪70中心處),而如上述 與重疊位置中之縱封緣相對應。密封爪70可橫向密封在三 層部,而刀2〇3可切斷三層部。較佳,刀2〇3的此實施例係 對外爪面254及管20配置,使得直緣381、382相對工件20 的入射角387係類似角度279 ,如上述圖8 Α實施例所示。 參照圖8G及8H,刀203的其他實施例在圖中具有切緣而 位於類似圖8 F之包裝環境中,圖8 G的實施例包括具有一弓 形之一切緣384且其曲率半徑位置係朝向安裝部374,使切 緣384概呈凸型。切緣3 8 4包含跨越刀寬W且較佳位於相對 橫向的中心之一拱形。切緣384在中點389側向延伸超過切 緣384端點呈一高度Η。較佳,高度Η對於刀寬W的比値介 於7%至20%之間,半徑對於刀寬W的比値較佳大於約5 、比値更佳大於約2。較佳,刀203的此實施例對於外爪面 254及工件2 0的配置使得刀係以類似圖8 A的角279之一入射 角·388來接合工件,在中點389處與切緣384呈切線的一線與 -44- 本紙張尺度過用宁國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填^本頁} - ini —--訂 ------- Γ . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ___B7_____ 五、發明說明(42 ) 工件之間測量入射角388。 參照圖8 Η,刀2〇3的另一實施例在圖中具有一弓形切緣 385,JI曲率半徑位置係遠離刀203以界定一概呈凹形切緣 385。切緣385包含跨越刀寬W且較佳位於橫向中心之一梃 形,切緣385概呈凹形丑在中點391處自切緣385端點390呈 側向往内延伸一高度Η。高度Η對於刀寬W及半徑對於刀寬 W之比値較佳係類似圖8 G實施例之比値,較佳,刀的配置 使得刀以類似圖8 Α實施例的角度2*79之一入射角392來接合 工件2 0,在端點390與切緣385呈切線的一線與工件2 0之間 測量入射角392。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖示實施例中,藉由如圖4、6、7切割第一及第二架構 件7 4 ' 7 6各外侧面安裝之凸輪27〇、272來啓動刀,以切斷 在對齊的密封爪間所固持之一管。凸輪270包括一斜坡,其 界定在一凸輪從動件276行進路徑内之一凸輪表面274,凸 輪從動件276安裝在交叉臂201延伸部213外侧(末)端處。以 相似方式,凸輪276包括一斜坡,其界定設在一凸輪從動件 276行進路徑内之一凸輪表面278,凸輪從動件276安裝在交 叉臂20 1延伸部215外侧(末)端處。由於這些凸輪從動件沿 其凸輪表面274、278移動,彈簧240及241受到壓縮且使交 叉臂201移往滑架的密封爪,因而將刀自滑架往外移動並與 管呈切斷接合。在扭輪從動件移過其Λ輪表面之後,彈菁 24〇及241自密封爪往内方向驅使交叉臂及刀203,故造成交 叉臂及刀抽出與管之切斷接合,並使刀回到其對於後續切 斷作業之儲存位置。 -45- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^5892 4 a7 ------B7_____ 五、發明說明(43 ) 一密封作業中,需使密封爪在移過熱密封站時接合管2〇 。密封爪隨管以相對於管速不會負面改變管的往前速度之 一速度往前移動,因此,在第一及第三架構件之間的空間 内及第二及第三架構件之間的空間内,提供第一及第二凸 輪280、282。係分別由整高安裝部284、286及288、290將各 凸輪固定在其各架構件之間的位置。圖16所示的凸輪280包 括沿其外周邊界定之一凸輪表面292,且凸輪282包括沿其 外周邊界定之一凸輪表面294。這些凸輪表面係界定滑架52 相關的密封爪70在朝向及遠離移過熱密封站28的一管的方 向中移動之定時及範圍。因此,安裝在桿H2内侧(末)端上 之凸輪從動件224適可接合第—凸輪290之凸輪表面292。安 裝在桿194内侧端上之凸輪從動件226適可接合第二凸輪 2982之凸輪表面294。因此,當滑架沿軌道58及60界定的 路徑移動時,凸輪從動件224、226係順應其各別凸輪之凸 輪表面輪扉。 如圖I6所示,各凸輪輪廓包括界定凸輪周邊之一突部298 的至少一部份,突部298位置係在對應滑架移動定時之位置 沿著凸輪表面,其時間内需使密封爪接合移動的管且與移 動的管保持接合’以在移動管橫向生成·—熱密封。當样的 内侧端上之凸輪從動件遇到各別凸輪的凸輪表面上之這些 突部,當管20移動通過熱密封站28時,桿192、194、及導 桿262及所附接的密封爪70係在遠離架及往外並朝向管20 之方向移動,桿192、194的此移動功能亦壓縮彈簧228、 229,故在凸輪從動件224、226已移過其各凸輪突部之後, -46- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注$項再填貧本頁)V. Description of the invention (39) The consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints and engraved the workpiece to cut the fabric 12 and because it can gradually cut on the fabric, it can cut the tube efficiently with a lower power than a non-beveled knife. 2 〇. In addition, the knife may have all edges parallel to the tube 20. Preferably, the angle 279 of the cutting edge 256 is an acute angle. The angle 279 is more preferably about 3 to 20 degrees, and most preferably about 5 to 10 degrees. The portion of the cutting edge 256 that is not parallel to the outer surface 254 of the sealing claw 70 and that is tangent to the tube 20 may not be linear. Referring now to FIGS. 8B-8D ′, the first embodiment of the knife 203 includes a substantially planar knife, a generally planar top surface 370 and a generally planar bottom surface 372 are separated to define the blade thickness T. Preferably, the knife has a uniform thickness τ, but the thickness can be changed. Preferably, the blade thickness T is preferably between about 0.2 to 3 mm, more preferably between about 0.5 to 1.5 mm, and the best approx. Mm. The blade has all edges 256 'at one end and a mounting portion 374 preferably provided at one of the opposite ends to secure the knife to an actuator. The mounting portion 374 preferably includes a hole 375 to allow screw mounting to pass, but other suitable mounting means may be used. The side edges 376 extend perpendicularly from the mounting edge to the cutting edge 256 and are preferably parallel to each other so that the cutter has a rectangular shape. In addition, the knife may have any shape suitable for mounting the knife on an actuator device, for example, the blade may have a back 255 to be mounted on an actuator, and a front 257 for cutting operations, and the back 255 may be more than the front 257 The narrow 0-cut edge 256 is straight in the figure, but may be sawtoothed or other shapes to improve cutting. For example, as detailed below, the cut edge may be arcuate or may include a majority of straight edges and a variety of other geometric structures suitable for cutting. Preferably, the cutting edge 256 is skewed and includes at least one cutting surface at an oblique angle to the bottom surface 372. As shown in ST8B, the knife 203 preferably has a first cutting surface 259 and a second cutting (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) — II Order ·! 'line! -H ^ 1 1 n It I t I 1 · III i I ln .1 I-45 ^ 924 V. Description of the invention (40 A7 B7 Printed cutting surface 261, cutting surface 259, 261 by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs It is preferably planar, but may be jagged or other non- + face geometry. The -cut surface 259 is oriented toward the cutting edge 256 and at an angle 377 relative to the bottom surface 372. The second cutting surface is located adjacent to the first cut The surface 259 is further away from the cutting edge 256 tip and is at an angle 378 relative to the bottom surface 372. The angles 377 and 378 are preferably acute and the preferred angle 377 is greater than the angle 378. The angle 377 is preferably between about 10 and 20 The angle and angle 378 are more preferably between about 0 and 60 degrees. The knife 203 is preferably made of a non-metal material (such as ceramics), and the knife 203 is preferably made of a non-conductive material. 203 is made of a material with a small particle boundary size. Preferably, the particle boundary size is smaller than stainless steel. More preferably, the particle boundary size is less than about 1 micron on average, more preferably less than 0.6 micron, and most preferably less than 0.05 micron. Good, knife 203 is made of a ceramic material, better material Including a junction oxide (such as zirconia), but other materials (such as alumina and silicon carbide) can also be used. Zirconium dioxide is very advantageous because most acids can not be etched, so the 'better knife 2003' Resistant to acids commonly found in foods (especially fruit juices and milks) and resist corrosion in acidic environments (for example, when cutting tubes filled with acid liquids such as various organic acids such as citric acid) ^ And 'Because the size of the grain boundary is smaller than that of a common stainless steel knife, less aggressive elements (such as the above-mentioned acid solution) enter the grain boundary to erode the edge. Therefore, the cutting edge 256 can retain sharpness for a longer time, so it can be used more Long time and cycle. Additional examples of knives are shown in Figures 8E-8 (b). These examples include non-linear cutting edges. In these embodiments, the geometry of the cutting edges is preferably in the direction of the tube 20 transverse to the center of the knife. Symmetrical, in this way, the knife can join the tube and be on the workpiece (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -------- Order --------- Line · α- 43- The standard of this paper applies to 5 Chinese standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ~~ A7 B7 '.'458924 V. Description of the invention (41) A horizontal symmetrical balance shear force is applied to reduce or eliminate the tendency of the workpiece to be biased in the _ transverse direction due to the shear force. Referring to Fig. 8E, the embodiment of the knife 203 includes a sawtooth-shaped cutting edge 379. Fig. 8F depicts another embodiment of the knife 203, which includes all edges 38o beyond the definition of the straight edge. In this embodiment, the straight edge 381 and 382 meet at a peak 386 at an angle 383, preferably, the angle 383 is an obtuse angle, and the angle 383 is more preferably between about 160 and 180 degrees. This embodiment of the knife 203 is a packaging environment and configuration in the figure At the center of the sealing claw 70. The sealing claw 70 is aligned with the sealing claw 71 and the joint pipe 20 in the figure. In Figs. 8F-8H, the 'tube 20 contains the fabric 12 folded on itself to define a three-layer portion (at the center of the sealing claw 70 in the figure), and corresponds to the longitudinal sealing edge in the overlapping position as described above. The sealing claw 70 can be horizontally sealed at the three-layer portion, and the knife 203 can cut the three-layer portion. Preferably, this embodiment of the knife 203 is configured with the outer claw surface 254 and the tube 20, so that the incident angle 387 of the straight edges 381, 382 with respect to the workpiece 20 is similar to the angle 279, as shown in the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 8A. Referring to FIGS. 8G and 8H, other embodiments of the knife 203 have cut edges in the figure and are located in a packaging environment similar to FIG. 8F. The embodiment of FIG. 8G includes an arc-shaped all-edge 384 and its radius of curvature is oriented. The mounting portion 374 makes the cutting edge 384 approximately convex. The cutting edge 3 8 4 includes an arch which spans the width W of the blade and is preferably located in the center of the opposite transverse direction. The cutting edge 384 extends laterally beyond the endpoint of the cutting edge 384 at a midpoint 389 at a midpoint 389. Preferably, the ratio Η of the height Η to the width W of the blade is between 7% and 20%, and the ratio 半径 of the radius to the width W of the blade is preferably greater than about 5, and more preferably greater than about 2 than 値. Preferably, in this embodiment of the knife 203, the configuration of the outer claw surface 254 and the workpiece 20 is such that the knife system engages the workpiece at an angle of incidence 388 similar to one of the angles 279 in FIG. 8A, and cuts 384 at the midpoint 389 A tangent line and -44- This paper has passed the Ning Guoguo Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling ^ This page}-ini —-- Order ------- Γ. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ___B7_____ V. Description of the invention (42) Measure the incident angle between the workpieces 388. Refer to Figure 8 Η, another embodiment of the knife 203 In the figure, there is a bow-shaped cutting edge 385, and the position of the radius of curvature of JI is away from the knife 203 to define a generally concave cutting edge 385. The cutting edge 385 includes a ridge shape that spans the width W of the knife and is preferably located in the transverse center. The generally concave shape extends laterally inward from the cutting edge 385 and the end point 390 at a midpoint 391 to a height Η. The height Η for the blade width W and the ratio of the radius to the blade width W is preferably similar to the embodiment of FIG. 8G The ratio is better. The configuration of the knife is such that the knife engages the workpiece 20 at an angle of incidence 392, which is similar to the angle 2 * 79 in the embodiment of FIG. 8A. The incident angle 392 is measured between a line tangent to the end point 390 and the cutting edge 385 and the workpiece 20. In the example printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the first example is cut as shown in Figures 4, 6, and 7. And the second frame member 7 4 ′ 7 6 are mounted with cams 27 0 and 272 on each outer side to activate the knife to cut off a tube held between the aligned sealing claws. The cam 270 includes a ramp which defines a cam A cam surface 274 in the path of the follower 276, which is mounted at the outer (end) end of the extension 213 of the cross arm 201. In a similar manner, the cam 276 includes a ramp that defines a cam follower One of the cam surfaces 278 in the travel path of the follower 276, and the cam follower 276 is installed at the outer (end) end of the extension 215 of the cross arm 201. As these cam followers move along their cam surfaces 274, 278, the spring 240 And 241 are compressed and move the cross arm 201 to the sealing claw of the carriage, so the knife is moved outward from the carriage and cut off and engaged with the tube. After the twisted wheel follower moves across the surface of its Λ wheel, the elastic spring 24. And 241 self-sealing claws drive the crossed arms inward The knife 203 caused the cross arm and the knife to be pulled out to engage with the cutting of the tube, and returned the knife to its storage position for subsequent cutting operations. -45- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 5892 4 a7 ------ B7_____ V. Description of the invention (43) In a sealing operation, the sealing claws need to be joined to the pipe when it is moved past the heat sealing station 2 〇. The sealing claw moves forward with the tube at a speed that does not negatively change the forward speed of the tube relative to the speed of the tube. Therefore, in the space between the first and third frame members and between the second and third frame members In the space, first and second cams 280, 282 are provided. The cams are fixed by the height-mounting sections 284, 286 and 288, 290, respectively, between the frame members. The cam 280 shown in FIG. 16 includes a cam surface 292 defined along its outer periphery, and the cam 282 includes a cam surface 294 defined along its outer periphery. These cam surfaces define the timing and range of movement of the sealing claws 70 associated with the carriage 52 in a direction toward and away from a tube moving past the heat sealing station 28. Therefore, the cam follower 224 mounted on the inner (end) end of the lever H2 is adapted to engage the cam surface 292 of the first cam 290. The cam follower 226 mounted on the inside end of the rod 194 is adapted to engage the cam surface 294 of the second cam 2982. Therefore, when the carriage moves along the path defined by the tracks 58 and 60, the cam followers 224, 226 conform to the cam surface wheels of the respective cams. As shown in Figure I6, each cam profile includes at least a portion of a protrusion 298 defining a periphery of the cam. The position of the protrusion 298 is along the cam surface at a position corresponding to the timing of the carriage movement, and the sealing claws must be engaged and moved within the time The tube is kept in engagement with the moving tube to generate in the lateral direction of the moving tube-heat sealing. When the cam follower on the inner side meets these protrusions on the cam surface of the respective cam, when the tube 20 moves through the heat sealing station 28, the rods 192, 194, and the guide rod 262 and the attached The sealing claw 70 is moved away from the frame and outward and toward the tube 20. This movement function of the rods 192, 194 also compresses the springs 228, 229, so after the cam followers 224, 226 have moved through their cam protrusions , -46- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling in the poor page)

SS

Cl Q A7 B7 五、發明說明(44 ) 彈簧228、229中之拉力將導桿262及密封爪70驅向滑架並遠 離管20。因爲各桿192、194銷接至導桿262外侧端,桿192 、194的此往外移動係移動並壓縮螺旋彈簧228、229。顯然 ’桿的此移動並未產生刀載具201對於滑架的交叉構件100 之相對移動,故刀並未移動。當凸輪從動件移動超過凸輪 280 ' 282凸輪表面上之各別突部298時,螺旋彈簧228、229 中之拉力係使桿回到其相對滑架的交叉構件之最内位置, 並抽出密封爪與管之接合。 密封爪需要對其間之管施加一第一初始壓力,然後對管 施加一較大壓力。請參照圖1 6,因此,各凸輪280、282可 在突部2兆端點302 —位置處包括另一突部300。當凸輪從動 件224、226接合另一突部300,桿192、194進一步驅動離開 滑架、因而以增加壓力將密封爪驅往管。爲了保護不過度 施壓至一管’密封爪由螺旋彈簧304、306安裝在導桿262。 本發明另一實施例中,如圖2 1所示,一慣性閂鎖係用以 防止治、封爪在其凸輪從動件脱離四輪軌道時延伸太遠。一 鉤420自刀载具200延伸而鄰近一閂鎖420。閂鎖421可移動 且較佳可旋轉以獲取或接合該鉤420,閂鎖421係防止密封 爪在一延伸方向中延伸,而當滑架沿軌道中的一曲線受驅 動時超過一預定位置。在軌道的彎曲位置時,向心力易使 刀從滑架延伸,閂鎖421具有一彎臂422,當閂鎖421位於一 鎖定位置時,其一鉤狀端424係接合鉤420。一重碼423配置 在彎臂422的相對端上、且較佳由一壓縮彈簧425往交叉構 件100呈偏壓,以此方式,閂鎖421往一開啓位置偏壓,其 -47- 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填"本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ---!1 訂!-----^ — — — — — — — — —— — — — — — — — — — — — — — 458 924 A7 B7 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 五、發明說明(45 中鉤狀端424係與鉤420脱離接合。較佳,利用滑架在滑架 彎部上及特別在底部處(此處童力亦使载具延伸)的動作造 成的加速度將閂鎖421從開啓移至關閉位置。因此,作業時 ,重碼423在加速度下往外搖擺,且鉤狀端424搖擺至一鎖 定位置並接合釣420,以防止密封爪移動離開滑架,此配置 及其他閂鎖機構亦可採用滑架上之其他工具(如密封爪), 閂鎖421亦可接合工具之不同部份或工具載體,以困住其離 開滑架之移動。 參照圖7及9 ’各滑架52進一步包括一安.裝框架310,其 在一端312固定至交叉構件1〇〇且以懸臂方式延伸超過滑架 的架76最外側以終止於懸掛第二架構件76外面316之一輕 314。如圖7所示,此概的腳318及320其間收納一平面狀安 裝板324的外緣Ml,平面狀安裝板324安裝在第二架構件76 外面且與之相隔並平行《此板外緣作用譬如係安裝呈卵形 且與軌道60爲一體之一印刷電路板323。軛的腳314及316之 一或兩内面係承載一或多個磁鐵,其在腳的内面上對於一 已知滑架具有特定位置。印刷電路板323可包括與輕腳内面 配置的一或多磁鐵相互作用之多數感測器,以作下文所述 之控制用途。另外,本發明可設想其他安裝枢架構造,安 裝框架可位於任何數量之其他位置處、且其位置或構造不 必爲上述方式。 現參照圖9A,滑架亦可包括一動力傳輸單元,以將動力 送到裝在滑架之一工具。較佳實施例中,如圖所示,密 封滑架53具有一動力傳輸介面單元,其將密封織物12所需 ----------— I — -------- 訂-------線* 一 ... ' f請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) α 48 - 458924Cl Q A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (44) The pulling force in the springs 228, 229 drives the guide rod 262 and the sealing claw 70 toward the carriage and away from the tube 20. Because each of the rods 192, 194 is connected to the outer end of the guide rod 262, this outward movement of the rods 192, 194 moves and compresses the coil springs 228, 229. Obviously, this movement of the lever has not caused the relative movement of the knife carrier 201 to the cross member 100 of the carriage, so the knife has not moved. When the cam follower moves beyond the respective protrusions 298 on the cam surface of the cam 280 '282, the tension in the coil springs 228, 229 returns the lever to the innermost position of its cross member relative to the carriage and pulls out the seal The claw engages the tube. The sealing jaws need to apply a first initial pressure to the tube therebetween, and then apply a larger pressure to the tube. Referring to FIG. 16, each of the cams 280 and 282 may include another protrusion 300 at the position of the protrusion 2 trillion end point 302. When the cam followers 224, 226 engage another protrusion 300, the rods 192, 194 are further driven away from the carriage, thereby driving the sealing jaws toward the tube with increased pressure. To protect against excessive pressure applied to a tube ', the seal claw is mounted on the guide rod 262 by coil springs 304,306. In another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 21, an inertia latch is used to prevent the claw and the sealing claw from extending too far when the cam follower leaves the four-wheel track. A hook 420 extends from the knife carrier 200 and is adjacent to a latch 420. A latch 421 is movable and preferably rotatable to acquire or engage the hook 420. The latch 421 prevents the sealing claw from extending in an extending direction and exceeds a predetermined position when the carriage is driven along a curve in the track. In the curved position of the track, centripetal force easily extends the knife from the carriage. The latch 421 has a curved arm 422. When the latch 421 is in a locked position, a hooked end 424 is engaged with the hook 420. A heavy code 423 is disposed on the opposite end of the curved arm 422, and is preferably biased by a compression spring 425 to the cross member 100. In this way, the latch 421 is biased to an open position, which is -47- Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --- !! Order! ----- ^ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 458 924 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The hooked end 424 is disengaged from the hook 420. Preferably, the latch 421 is removed from the acceleration caused by the movement of the carriage on the curved portion of the carriage and particularly at the bottom (where child force also extends the vehicle). Open to move to the closed position. Therefore, during operation, the heavy code 423 swings outward under acceleration, and the hook end 424 swings to a locked position and engages the fishing 420 to prevent the sealing claws from moving away from the carriage. This configuration and other latching mechanisms Other tools on the carriage (such as sealing claws) can also be used, and the latch 421 can also engage different parts of the tool or the tool carrier to trap its movement away from the carriage. Refer to Figures 7 and 9 'Each carriage 52 It further includes a mounting frame 310, which is fixed to the cross member 100 at one end 312 and cantilevered beyond the outermost side of the frame 76 to terminate at one of the outer 316 of the second frame member 76, such as 314. As shown in Figure 7, The approximate feet 318 and 320 receive an outer edge M1 of a planar mounting plate 324. The planar mounting plate 324 is installed outside the second frame member 76 and is spaced apart from and parallel to the outer edge of the plate. It is a printed circuit board 323 integrated with the track 60. One or both of the inner surfaces of the feet 314 and 316 of the yoke carry one or more magnets, which have a specific position on the inner surface of the foot for a known carriage. Printed circuit The plate 323 may include a plurality of sensors that interact with one or more magnets disposed on the inner surface of the light foot for control purposes described below. In addition, the present invention contemplates other mounting pivot configurations, and the mounting frame may be located at any number of At other positions, and its position or structure need not be the above. Now referring to FIG. 9A, the carriage may also include a power transmission unit to send power to a tool mounted on the carriage. In a preferred embodiment, as shown in FIG. As shown, the sealing carriage 53 has a power transmission interface unit, which will seal the fabric 12 required ----------- I — -------- order --------- Line * a ... 'f Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) α 48- 458924

五、發明說明(46 ) 動力送到密封爪71。密封滑架53之密封爪71具有附接至密 封爪71 —端之—動力介面塊349,動力介面塊349係由一 “L“框架351安裝在交又臂1〇〇、且其位置在滑架53沿路徑 99行進時係面對密封次總成5〇架構件76内部^ 一動力傳輸 單元339係由架構件76支撐鄰近動力介面塊349以感應方式 傳送動力至動力介面塊349。電引線353自介面塊349延伸並 連接至一安裝塊362,一對板364及一蓋塊366附接至安裝塊 3 62 (譬如藉由螺絲或任何其他適當附接裝置)以與密封爪7】 完成一電路。如上述,電流前往密封爪 '然後施至織物12 產生密封。 然而,上述主要針對單一熱密封次總成,可瞭解各熱密 封總成需要至少兩個熱密封次總成,第二次總成大致爲上 述第一次總成之一鏡像,且包括兩次總成之類似元件或組 件。兩次總成間之一差異爲第二次總成不包括刀及其安 裝組件,而是,第二次總成之長形密封桿設有沿密封桿長 度延伸之一中央定位槽,以在切緣切斷兩次總成之相對齊 密封爪間之管同時及之後,在該槽内收納刀的切緣。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 現參照圖19及20,以另一滑架1052顯示另一實施例,此 實施例中,藉由沿路徑99驅動滑架1052以沿密封爪凸輪 1280、1282移動凸輪從動件1224、1226,來啓動刀203。類 似上述實施例,第一及第二凸輪1280、1282係沿路徑9 9配 置並固定在其各架構件之間的位置,以引動與滑架相附接 之一工具。較佳,凸輪1280、1282具有類似的凸輪表面, 其當密封爪移動通過密封站28中之工作區30時,大致界定 -49- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS〉A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A75. Description of the invention (46) The power is sent to the sealing claw 71. The sealing claw 71 of the sealing carriage 53 has a power interface block 349 attached to the end of the sealing claw 71. The power interface block 349 is mounted on the cross arm 100 by an "L" frame 351, and its position is sliding. When the rack 53 travels along the path 99, it faces the inside of the sealed subassembly 50 frame member 76. A power transmission unit 339 is supported by the frame member 76 adjacent to the power interface block 349 to inductively transmit power to the power interface block 349. Electrical leads 353 extend from the interface block 349 and are connected to a mounting block 362, a pair of plates 364 and a cover block 366 are attached to the mounting block 3 62 (e.g., by screws or any other suitable attachment means) to seal the jaws 7 ] Complete a circuit. As mentioned above, the current goes to the sealing claws' and is then applied to the fabric 12 to create a seal. However, the above is mainly for a single heat-sealing sub-assembly. It can be understood that each heat-sealing assembly requires at least two heat-sealing sub-assemblies. The second assembly is roughly a mirror image of the first assembly and includes two An assembly is a similar element or component. One of the differences between the two assemblies is that the second assembly does not include the knife and its mounting components. Instead, the long sealing rod of the second assembly is provided with a central positioning groove extending along the length of the sealing rod to The cutting edge cuts the tube between the two seals between the claws at the same time and after that, the cutting edge receives the cutting edge of the knife in the groove. The consumer cooperation of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China is now referring to FIGS. 19 and 20, and another embodiment is shown with another carriage 1052. In this embodiment, the carriage 1052 is driven along the path 99 to follow the sealing claw cam 1280 , 1282 moves the cam followers 1224, 1226 to start the knife 203. Similar to the above-mentioned embodiment, the first and second cams 1280 and 1282 are arranged along the path 99 and fixed at positions between their respective structural members to actuate a tool attached to the carriage. Preferably, the cams 1280 and 1282 have similar cam surfaces. When the sealing claw moves through the working area 30 in the sealing station 28, it is roughly defined. -49- This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 specification (210 X 297 Mm) A7

^ f 458924 五、發明說明(47 ) 密封爪70在朝向及遠離管20之一延伸與縮回方向的移動正 時及範圍。 如圖20所示,凸輪1280包括沿其外周邊界定之—凸輪表 面1292,較佳,凸輪1282具有類似凸輪1280凸輪表面1292之 一凸輪表面1294(未圖不)’ Λ輪從動件1224安裝在桿1192内 侧端上且適可接合第一凸輪12S0之凸輪表面1292,安裝在 捍1194内侧端上之凸輪從動件1226適可接合第二凸輪〗282 之凸輪表面1294,因此,當滑架1052沿路徑99移動時,凸 輪從動件I222、I224係順應其各別凸輪的凸輪表面輪靡。 各凸輪輪廓包括界定凸輪周邊的一突部1298之至少—部份 ,突部1298位置係在對應於一密封爪接合一移動管之移動 正時處沿著凸輪表面。凸’輪表面亦使密封爪與一移動管2〇 保持接合,以形成一密封。 舄了產生一密封,第一及第二样1192、1194可滑式安裝 在刀載具1200,密封爪70由桿1152、1154可滑式附接至刀 載具12〇0,且彈簧1132、II34位於密封爪7〇與刀載具12〇〇 之間以使密封爪自刀載具往外偏壓離開。當凸輪從動件 1224、I226通過凸輪表面1292上之一第一凸部上時,桿U92 、1194延伸至一密封位置。作業期間,桿的此移動係使刀 載具1200延伸離開滑架1〇52之交又構件11〇〇,當刀載具12〇〇 移往移動的管20,密封爪70係接合織物12並與密封爪71 相對齊,密封爪71附接至相似的滑架,並施熱至密封管2〇。 此實施例中,在密封該管2 0之後,凸輪從動件1224、 1Ζ26接合凸輪表面1292端點上之其他突部,以切斷管2〇。 -50- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填^本頁) -.λ I— 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458924 A7^ f 458924 5. Description of the invention (47) The timing and range of movement of the sealing claw 70 in the extending and retracting direction toward and away from one of the tubes 20. As shown in FIG. 20, the cam 1280 includes a cam surface 1292 defined along its outer periphery. Preferably, the cam 1282 has a cam surface 1294 similar to the cam 1280 cam surface 1292 (not shown). The Λ wheel follower 1224 is installed. The cam surface 1292 on the inner end of the rod 1192 is adapted to engage the first cam 12S0, and the cam follower 1226 mounted on the inner end of the 1194 is adapted to engage the cam surface 1294 of the second cam 282. Therefore, when the carriage When 1052 moves along path 99, the cam followers I222 and I224 follow the cam surfaces of their respective cams. Each cam profile includes at least a portion of a protrusion 1298 that defines the periphery of the cam. The location of the protrusion 1298 is along the cam surface at a timing corresponding to the movement timing of a sealing claw engaging a moving tube. The convex wheel surface also keeps the sealing claw in engagement with a moving tube 20 to form a seal. The first and second specimens 1192, 1194 are slidably mounted on the knife carrier 1200, the sealing claw 70 is slidably attached to the knife carrier 1200 by levers 1152, 1154, and the spring 1132, II34 is located between the sealing claw 70 and the knife carrier 1200 so that the sealing claw is biased away from the knife carrier outward. When the cam followers 1224, I226 pass through one of the first protrusions on the cam surface 1292, the levers U92, 1194 extend to a sealed position. During operation, this movement of the rod causes the knife carrier 1200 to extend away from the intersection of the carriage 1052 and the member 1100. When the knife carrier 1200 moves to the moving tube 20, the sealing claw 70 engages the fabric 12 and Aligned with the sealing claw 71, the sealing claw 71 is attached to a similar carriage and is heated to the sealing tube 20. In this embodiment, after sealing the tube 20, the cam followers 1224, 1Z26 engage other protrusions on the end of the cam surface 1292 to cut the tube 20. -50- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -.λ I—Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458924 A7

五、發明說明(48 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 因此,凸輪1280、1282包括突部1298端點一位置處之另一 大部1300。當凸輪從動件接合突部13〇〇時,刀載具12〇〇進 步移動離開交又構件11 〇〇而壓縮彈簧〗丨32、丨〗34。此位 置中’翁封爪70已與管2〇相抵接,且刀2〇3移動通過槽258 並切斷管20。當凸輪從動件通過其在凸輪128〇、1282的凸 輪表面上之各別突部1298、1300時,螺旋彈簧1228、1 229 中 < 拉力使桿退回其對交叉構件11〇〇之最内位置,此作用 使密封爪70縮回與管20之接合。 另一實施例中’如圖2 1所示,一慣性鎖421安裝在滑架並 對滑架沿路徑之向心動作很敏感,且可隨密封工具操作而 防止密封工具離心移動超過—預定位置。譬如,慣性鎖421 可在&輪從動件脱離凸輪軌道時用以防止密封爪7〇延伸太 遠’慣性鎖421包含一鉤422及一閂鎖420,鉤422自交叉構 件100延伸且配置鄰近自刀載具2〇〇延伸之一閂鎖42〇。鉤 422可移動且較佳可旋轉以獲取或接合閂鎖42〇,當裝有刀 載具200之滑架1052沿軌道中之一曲線驅動(因向心力使得 刀易自滑架延伸時),防止密封爪70在一延伸方向中延伸超 過一預定位置。鉤422具有一鉤狀端424,其在鉤422位於一 鎖定位置時係接合閂鎖420。一重碼423配置在鉤422的相對 端上且較佳由一壓縮彈簧425往交叉構件100呈偏壓,使鉤 422偏壓朝向其中鉤狀端424與鉤420脱離接合之一開啓位置 。較佳’利用滑架在軌道曲線上及特別在底部處(此處重力 亦使刀載具200延伸)的動作造成的加速度將鉤422從開啓移 至關閉位置。因此,作業時,重碼423在加速度下於鉤422 -51- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準<CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -I ^ Ϊ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ n ^ I- ^ ^ ^ ^ 1 一 I I n I ^ ^ (請先閱讀背面之注$項再填窝本頁) 線_ α ^58924 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(49 ) 端點處往外搖擺,且鉤狀端424搖擺至一鎖定位置、並接合 閂鎖420以防止齊封爪移動離開滑架j〇52,此配置及其他鎖 定機構亦可採用滑架上之其他工具(如密封爪),鉤422亦可 鉤至工具之不同部份或工具載體,以困住其離開滑架之移 動。 現參照圖2 2 - 3 1 ’本發明另一實施例在密封次總成1600之 軌道1602、1604上安裝有一滑架1500,次總成具有三個架 構件1606、16〇8、1610,轨道1602、1604在圖中安裝在架構 件1606、1610,軌道較佳沿架構件1606、1610整體内周邊安 裝’以上述實施例相同方式完成一電路。滑架15〇〇在圖中 安裝在電路工作區1634中,並設定接合一工件(如管20)以 在工件上進行一作業。 如圖2 3及2 4所示’此實施例之滑架1500較佳包括安裝以 相對滑架體部作朝向及遠離在延伸與縮回位置之間工件的 往復移動之三個工具6滑架15〇〇、15〇1包括一密封爪15〇2 、一切具(如刀15〇4)、及一容積控制器U06。各工具可各 別獨立引動,譬如藉由一凸輪機構、線性馬達、氣動缸或 其他適當引動器或馬達。較佳,採用的一凸輪機構具有連 接至與凸輪相接合之一引動桿1508、1512、1516之工具。雖 可提供單桿’較佳對於移動的各個工具提供至少兩样,以 降低可能因捍彎曲造成的黏滯及磨擦,因此,藉由每工具 中提供兩桿,可產生工具相對電路之直線往復移動。 桿1508、1512、1516較佳配置在與滑架體部或交又構件 1532相垂直之三個分離的平行分佈平面上,可當滑架位於 -52- 本紙張尺度適用中國财標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇Χ297公髮) (諳先閲讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) ίι訂--------•線!V. Description of the invention (48) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Therefore, the cams 1280, 1282 include another large part 1300 at one end of the protruding part 1298. When the cam follower engages the projection 1300, the knife carrier 12000 moves further away from the cross member 1100 and compresses the springs 〔32, 丨〕 34. In this position, 'Wengfeng claw 70 has abutted against tube 20, and knife 203 moves through slot 258 and cuts tube 20. As the cam follower passes its respective projections 1298, 1300 on the cam surfaces of the cams 128o, 1282, the coil springs 1228, 1 229 < pulls the rod back into its innermost cross member 1100 Position, this action retracts the sealing claw 70 into engagement with the tube 20. In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, an inertia lock 421 is installed on the carriage and is sensitive to the centripetal movement of the carriage along the path, and can prevent the sealing tool from centrifugally moving beyond the predetermined position with the operation of the sealing tool. . For example, the inertia lock 421 can be used to prevent the sealing claw 70 from extending too far when the & wheel follower is off the cam track. The 'inertia lock 421 includes a hook 422 and a latch 420, which extends from the cross member 100 and A latch 42 is provided adjacent to one of the 200 extensions of the self-knife carrier. The hook 422 is movable and preferably can be rotated to obtain or engage the latch 42. When the carriage 1052 equipped with the knife carrier 200 is driven along one of the tracks (when the knife easily extends from the carriage due to centripetal force), it prevents The sealing claw 70 extends beyond a predetermined position in an extending direction. The hook 422 has a hooked end 424 which engages the latch 420 when the hook 422 is in a locked position. A heavy code 423 is disposed on the opposite end of the hook 422 and is preferably biased toward the cross member 100 by a compression spring 425, so that the hook 422 is biased toward an open position in which the hook-shaped end 424 is disengaged from the hook 420. Preferably, the hook 422 is moved from the open to the closed position using the acceleration caused by the movement of the carriage on the orbit curve and particularly at the bottom (where gravity also extends the knife carrier 200). Therefore, during operation, the heavy code 423 is hooked 422 -51 under acceleration. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard < CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -I ^ Ϊ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ n ^ I- ^ ^ ^ ^ 1 I II n I ^ ^ (Please read the note on the back of the page before filling in this page) Line _ α ^ 58924 A7 B7 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (49) The end point swings outward, and the hooked end 424 swings to a locked position, and engages the latch 420 to prevent the sealing claw from moving away from the carriage j052. This configuration and other locking mechanisms can also use other tools on the carriage (Such as sealing claws), the hook 422 can also be hooked to different parts of the tool or the tool carrier to trap its movement away from the carriage. 2 2-3 1 'Another embodiment of the present invention is equipped with a carriage 1500 on the track 1602, 1604 of the sealed subassembly 1600. The subassembly has three structural members 1606, 160, 1610, and rails. 1602 and 1604 are installed on the frame members 1606 and 1610 in the figure, and the rails are preferably installed along the entire inner periphery of the frame members 1606 and 1610 to complete a circuit in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The carriage 150 is installed in the circuit work area 1634 in the figure, and is set to engage a workpiece (such as the tube 20) to perform a job on the workpiece. As shown in Figures 2 3 and 24, 'the carriage 1500 of this embodiment preferably includes three tools 6 carriages mounted to reciprocate toward and away from the workpiece between the extended and retracted positions of the carriage. 1500, 1501 includes a sealing claw 1502, all tools (such as a knife 1504), and a volume controller U06. Each tool can be actuated independently, such as by a cam mechanism, linear motor, pneumatic cylinder, or other suitable actuator or motor. Preferably, a cam mechanism is used which has a tool connected to an actuation lever 1508, 1512, 1516 which is engaged with the cam. Although a single lever can be provided, it is better to provide at least two kinds of each moving tool to reduce the stickiness and friction that may be caused by bending. Therefore, by providing two levers in each tool, a linear reciprocation of the tool to the circuit can be generated. mobile. The rods 1508, 1512, and 1516 are preferably arranged on three separate parallel distribution planes that are perpendicular to the carriage body or the cross member 1532. When the carriage is located at -52-, this paper standard applies to the Chinese financial standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇 × 297) (read the note $ on the back before filling in this page) 订 order -------- • line!

五、發明說明(50 操作區時,使桿在較佳與工件成法線方向中移動。較佳, 桿具有附接至其末端卫順應工具幻動凸輪之必輪從動件 1520、1524及1528。如圖27及28所示,較佳採用三個分離 的凸輪:密封爪凸輪1 534、容積控制岛輪1536、及刀凸輪 1538,其中一凸輪係驅動連接至各工具。密封爪及切 具15 04具有上述功能。 容積控制器工具1506係在作業期間移向及移離管2〇而介 於延伸與縮回位置之間,參照圖2 3,此實施例之容積控制 工具1506包括一容積控制器板1580,容積控制器板158〇在 一端樞設在一支撑構件1582上、在相對端則樞設在密封爪 1 5 0 2。容積控制器板〗5 8 0較佳概呈xj型且在相對侧向侧上 具有臂1586、1588,故可更精確控制織物中接合板158〇 的部份之容積及形狀。對於容積控制器板亦可採用其他形 狀,支撑構件1 5 8 2係附接至一引動機構以將容積控制器 1580移向及移離工件或移動管20。較佳採用一凸輪引動機 構’並包括桿1 5 1 2及凸輪從動件1 5 2 4以順應容積控制凸 輪1536 。 如圖22所示,一接觸吸收構件可附接至各滑架1500,以 在作業期間若彼此相接觸時防止損及滑架,較佳,圍繞一 軸1551之一彈簧1550係安裝在滑架體部1532上。以此方式 ,當相鄰滑架相接觸時,至少一部份接觸力係可吸收於相 鄰滑架之間。一彈性橡膠材料可以添加或取代方式安裝在 滑架體部1532,以界定一緩衝器來吸收相鄰滑架之間的接 觸。 -53· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)V. Description of the invention (50 in the operating area, the lever is preferably moved in a direction normal to the workpiece. Preferably, the lever has inevitable wheel followers 1520, 1524 and 1520, 1524 and 1528. As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, three separate cams are preferably used: a sealing claw cam 1 534, a volume control island wheel 1536, and a knife cam 1538, one of which is drivingly connected to each tool. The sealing claw and the cutting The tool 15 04 has the above-mentioned function. The volume controller tool 1506 is moved toward and away from the tube 20 between the extended and retracted positions during operation. Referring to FIG. 23, the volume control tool 1506 of this embodiment includes a Volume controller board 1580, volume controller board 1580 is pivotally mounted on a support member 1582 at one end, and the sealing claw 1 50 2 is mounted at the opposite end. Volume controller board 5 8 0 Type and has arms 1586, 1588 on the opposite side, so it can more accurately control the volume and shape of the part of the joint plate 158 in the fabric. For the volume controller board, other shapes can also be used, the supporting member 1 5 8 2 Attach to an actuating mechanism to control volume 1580 moves toward and away from the workpiece or the tube 20. A cam drive mechanism is preferably used and includes a lever 1 5 1 2 and a cam follower 1 5 2 4 to conform to the volume control cam 1536. As shown in FIG. 22, a A contact absorbing member may be attached to each of the carriages 1500 to prevent damage to the carriage if they come into contact with each other during operation, preferably, a spring 1550 around a shaft 1551 is mounted on the carriage body 1532. In this manner When adjacent carriages come into contact, at least a part of the contact force can be absorbed between adjacent carriages. An elastic rubber material can be added or replaced to be installed on the carriage body 1532 to define a bumper to Absorb the contact between adjacent carriages. -53 · This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

i — ί—訂·--I--11II 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製i — ί—Order · --I--11II Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4δ8924 五、發明說明(51 ) 現參照圖29,討論容積控制器的作業,作業時,容積控 制器板1582先位於一未接合位置,現參照圖29討論容積控 制器的作業,作業時,容積控制器板158〇首先位於一未接 合位置且對於在相對次總成上(位置A)之一滑架上提供的 一相對未接合容積控制器呈對準。對準之後,相對容積控 制器1506在朝向管20之一方向引動,因此,當支撑構件 1582移離開滑架1500、1501時,容積控制器板158〇係傾斜接 合該管20,較佳,容積控制器板158〇樞轉至與管2〇概呈平 行之一位置。臂1586、1588較佳與相對容積控制器上之相 對的臂相對準,以接合並大致沿其圓周圍繞且擠壓該管, 以控制管2〇其間保持部份之容積(點B)。當管在相對容積 控制板之間受擠壓時,板之間的内含物係在遠離容積控制 器板1580間之方向中受力’較佳預先決定相對的容積控制 器板1580之間隔,但是,容積控制器可接合該管或進一步 視需要擠壓該管(譬如下述藉由調整容積控制凸輪)。當容 積控制器脱離接合時,支撐構件係移回而前往滑架體部 1S32’且容積控制器板1580傾斜而與管脱離接合。 現參照圖27及28顯示較佳的引動器凸輪,參照圖27顯示 較佳的密封爪凸輪1 5 3 4及容積控制凸輪1536,密封爪凸輪 1534較佳包含一個具一概呈u型剖面之執道,使凸輪從動 件1520承載在轨道内。圖28中顯示較佳的刀引動器,引動 器較佳爲一偏心凸輪1 53 8,其接合凸輪從動件1526、1528 。凸輪從動件1526、1528沿滑架15〇〇路徑配置,其桿使刀 1504在朝向及遠離工件的方向中自滑架15〇〇延伸及縮回。 -54- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐了 I H . 1 - Ϊ— ^1 ^1 ^1 ^1 一-β, 1 I I n n l n n ϋ I - - ϋ ϋ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I .: Λ ir 9 24 A7 B7 五、發明說明(52 ) 較佳可調整容積控制器工具丨506,容積控制凸輪1536可 相對架構件1606在朝向及遠離管2〇之方向中移動,以調整 容積控制器可施在管20上之接合或擠壓量,因此,有時在 FFS作業時係需微調或人工調整容積控制凸輪μ%。如圖22 及20所示’ 一圓把1616設置在密封次總成woo架構件 外侧上、且以聯桿連接至容積控制凸輪1536,而可人工移 動容積控制凸輪1536。 各滑架進一步較佳包括一制動器,以選擇性停止滑架沿 電路之移動,參照圖7之實施例,一框架182設有一制動藝 180且附接至腳1〇2末端178,制動塾180係朝向安裝在架構 件7 4内侧面上之一制動板183。制動板183較佳安裝在延伸 過架構件74厚度之一制動缸184上,且位置可接合一電磁開 關188或適合將制動器移入及移出與制動塾ι8〇的接合之其 他裝置。 參照圖30及3 1顯示另一制動系統,一制動板1618係附接 至架構件1610内部,制動板1618的構造及尺寸係沿滑架行 進之整體電路或路徑延伸。較佳,制動板1618概呈卵形且 沿架構件1610周邊延伸並鄰近軌道1604且與之相隔〇多數 彈簧1620配置於制動板1618與架構件1610内側面之間,以 使制動板往内朝向軌道1602、1604上安裝的滑架作彈性偏 壓,以接合制動墊1622或裝在滑架之屐部β制動缸1624附 接至制動板1618且設置在架構件1610外侧上,以藉由使其 在遠離滑架之侧向縮回而與制動板1618脱離接合,以使裝 在各滑架上之制動墊1622或屐部脱離接合。最佳,制動叙 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives 4δ8924 V. Description of the Invention (51) Now referring to FIG. 29, the operation of the volume controller will be discussed. During operation, the volume controller board 1582 is first located in an unengaged position. Volume controller work. During operation, the volume controller board 1580 is first located in an unengaged position and aligned with a relatively unengaged volume controller provided on one of the carriages on the relative subassembly (position A). . After the alignment, the relative volume controller 1506 is guided in one of the directions of the tube 20. Therefore, when the support member 1582 moves away from the carriages 1500 and 1501, the volume controller plate 1580 is inclined to engage the tube 20, preferably, the volume The controller plate 158 ° is pivoted to a position approximately parallel to the tube 20. The arms 1586, 1588 are preferably aligned with the opposite arms on the relative volume controller to engage and surround and squeeze the tube approximately along its circumference to control the volume of the tube 20 that holds part of it (point B). When the tube is squeezed between the relative volume control plates, the contents between the plates are stressed in a direction away from the volume controller plates 1580. It is preferable to determine the interval between the opposite volume controller plates 1580 in advance, However, the volume controller can engage the tube or further squeeze the tube as needed (such as by adjusting the volume control cam described below). When the volume controller is disengaged, the support member is moved back to the carriage body 1S32 'and the volume controller plate 1580 is inclined to disengage from the tube. Referring now to FIGS. 27 and 28, a preferred actuator cam is shown. Referring to FIG. 27, a preferred seal claw cam 1 5 3 4 and a volume control cam 1536 are shown. The seal claw cam 1534 preferably includes an actuator having a generally u-shaped cross section. Track, so that the cam follower 1520 is carried in the track. A preferred knife actuator is shown in Fig. 28. The actuator is preferably an eccentric cam 1 53 8 which engages the cam followers 1526, 1528. The cam followers 1526 and 1528 are arranged along the path of the carriage 150, and their rods make the knife 1504 extend and retract from the carriage 150 in the direction toward and away from the workpiece. -54- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm IH. 1-Ϊ— ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 a-β, 1 II nnlnn ϋ I--ϋ ϋ ( Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) I .: Λ ir 9 24 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (52) Better adjustable volume controller tool 丨 506, the volume control cam 1536 can be oriented relative to the frame member 1606 And move away from the tube 20 in order to adjust the amount of joint or squeeze that the volume controller can apply to the tube 20. Therefore, sometimes it is necessary to fine-tune or manually adjust the volume control cam μ% during FFS operation. As shown in 22 and 20, a circle is provided with 1616 on the outside of the sealing sub-assembly woo frame member, and is connected to the volume control cam 1536 by a link, and the volume control cam 1536 can be manually moved. Each carriage further preferably includes a brake To selectively stop the movement of the carriage along the circuit, referring to the embodiment of FIG. 7, a frame 182 is provided with a braking technique 180 and is attached to the end 102 of the foot 102, and the braking cymbal 180 is installed in the frame member 7 4 facing One brake plate 183 on the side. The brake plate 183 is preferably installed in the extension One of the thicknesses of the frame member 74 is on the brake cylinder 184, and the position can be engaged with an electromagnetic switch 188 or other device suitable for moving the brake in and out of engagement with the brake 塾 80. Referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, another brake system is shown, A brake plate 1618 is attached to the inside of the frame member 1610. The structure and dimensions of the brake plate 1618 extend along the overall circuit or path of the carriage. Preferably, the brake plate 1618 is oval and extends along the periphery of the frame member 1610. The track 1604 is adjacent to and separated from it. Most of the springs 1620 are arranged between the brake plate 1618 and the inner side of the frame member 1610, so that the brake plate is inwardly biased toward the carriage mounted on the track 1602, 1604 to engage the brake. A pad 1622 or a cymbal β brake cylinder 1624 mounted on the carriage is attached to the brake plate 1618 and is provided on the outside of the frame member 1610 to be disengaged from the brake plate 1618 by causing it to retract sideways away from the carriage. Engage to disengage the brake pad 1622 or crotch mounted on each carriage. Best, brake description (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

H ----訂· I ! ! I - I - .經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -55- B S24 A7 B7 五、發明說明(53 1624受到壓力且制動板1618脱離接合,而在制動缸1624未 受壓力時’制動板1618相接合。因此,當制動缸1624不具 動力或解除啓動時,制動板1618自然往内偏壓以接合滑架 的制動塾1622,並停止電路周圍之滑架移動。且較佳,制 動系統不具動力時,制動系統可使制動器脱離接合以維修 系統或類似物。 參照圖3 1,較佳制動墊1622安裝在滑架15〇〇外侧,而一 彈簧1626設在制動墊1622與滑架1500之間,以使制動墊彈 性偏壓離開滑架外側,如此係可在所有制動墊1622上更平 均地控制制動恩力,且系統可更容忍一個略呈非平面狀之 制動板1618或改變厚度或因公差堆曼或類似物而處於變化 位置之制動板1622。並且,制動系統的構造較佳可使制動 板足夠零敏移動以在一預定時間使滑架暫停,同時防止損 及滑架1500、1501、彈簧1626、或管20。 各滑架較佳包括輪,以接合軌道並幫助滑架沿軌道行進 ’圖2 3的實施例中’輪145、146、147、148係附接至對接 至弟一及弟二腳102、128外部之一輪板144 〇輪板144具有 一第一組輪145、147,其位置朝向滑架外端,及一第二组 輪146、148 ’其位置朝向滑架内侧端。輪較佳概呈梯形構 造排列’使滑架良好承載於轨道之直線及寶段上,第一組 之輪145、147比起第二組的輪146' 148略微更緊密分佈, 以當滑架沿軌道的一彎段行進時幫助轉向。 圖2 2 - 3 1的實施例中,較佳,輪板144以概呈仲縮方式附 接至脚102、128’而可有更大的軌道公差3參照圖25,一 -56- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) /農--------訂---------線— - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458 924H ---- Order · I!! I-I-. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy -55- B S24 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (53 1624 is under pressure and the brake plate 1618 is disengaged, and When the brake cylinder 1624 is not under pressure, the brake plate 1618 is engaged. Therefore, when the brake cylinder 1624 is not powered or is deactivated, the brake plate 1618 is naturally biased inward to engage the brake pad 1622 of the carriage and stop the surrounding circuit. The carriage moves. And preferably, when the brake system is not powered, the brake system can disengage the brakes to repair the system or the like. Referring to FIG. 31, the preferred brake pad 1622 is installed outside the carriage 1500, and a A spring 1626 is provided between the brake pad 1622 and the carriage 1500, so that the brake pad is elastically biased away from the outside of the carriage, so that the braking force can be more evenly controlled on all the brake pads 1622, and the system can tolerate a slight A non-planar brake plate 1618 or a brake plate 1622 that changes its thickness or is in a changed position due to tolerance stacking or the like. Also, the brake system is preferably constructed so that the brake plate can move sufficiently insensitively to make it at a predetermined time. Carriage Pause while preventing damage to the carriages 1500, 1501, spring 1626, or tube 20. Each carriage preferably includes wheels to engage the track and help the carriage travel along the track 'in the embodiment of Fig. 23' wheels 145, 146 147, 148 are attached to one of the wheel boards 144, which are connected to the outside of the first and second feet 102, 128. The wheel board 144 has a first set of wheels 145, 147, which are positioned toward the outer end of the carriage, and a second Group wheels 146, 148 'The position is toward the inner end of the carriage. The wheels are preferably arranged in a trapezoidal configuration' so that the carriage can be well loaded on the straight line and the treasure section of the track. The wheels 145 and 147 of the first group are better than the second group The wheels 146 '148 are slightly more closely spaced to help steer as the carriage travels along a curved section of the track. In the embodiment of Figures 2-31, it is preferred that the wheel plates 144 are attached in a generally contracted manner To the feet 102, 128 ', you can have a larger track tolerance. 3 Refer to Figure 25, I-56- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page again) / Agriculture -------- Order --------- Online--Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458 924

五、發明說明(54 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 輪板144較佳由與腳102、128外部垂直排列之銷151安裝在 腳102、128,且可在朝向及遠離脚1〇2、128外部之一方向 略爲伸縮進去或伸縮出來,以容納離開軌道幾何形狀、與 之不乎行或不對準之軌道'或軌道配置之任何其他較小缺 陷。因此,滑架沿軌道之定位具有部份餘裕,特別在軌道 中直線段轉換成一軌道彎段的部份之内。並且,輪板144具 有一凹切口 149,其朝向第一及第二脚102、128的外部且能 夠伸縮前往或遠離滑架之外端,即使軌道58、60的軌不當 相隔或在側向呈不當平行,此伸縮特徵亦可使滑架平順行 進。轨道從動件在滑架相對侧可改變間隔以容納不平行軌 道中之不完美處。另外,附接至滑架一侧之一组輪可具有 一平坦輪廓,使輪可沿轨平坦承載且可相對轨呈側向移動c 參照圖2 5 B及2 5 C ’顯示滑架輪之另一實施例,一組輪 155(較佳包括四個輪)係附接至滑架一侧,輪ι55具有—平 坦輪廓’使得輪可沿一轨道156平坦承載,較佳,轨道156 亦有一平坦輪廓以配合輪155形狀。作業時,輪155係沿路 徑順應轨道156,但可相對軌道156作侧向移動,以容納— 對未概呈平行且有變化間距之轨道之不完美處。輪155及軌 道156的其他形狀可用於其他實施例中,譬如緩和_曲輪廓 而非平坦或槽狀。較佳,軌道156在外表面具有跑道或軌 157,且輪155的外表面158具有與軌157相對應形狀。另外 ’輪155及軌道156可有不同形狀,譬如,輪15 5可如圖25B 所示爲平坦狀,而軌道156可如圖11A所示類似軌道58、 60呈截角狀,且有類似軌140、142之軌,因此,輪155可平 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - ----訂---------線— ϋ -57- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4現格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 458 924 五、發明說明(55 坦承載在執140、142上旦可相對軌140、142呈側向移動, 同時防止滑架與軌道對於路徑呈徑向分離,使滑架保持順 應該路徑。 參照圖25D,顯示滑架輪158之另一實施例,此實施例中 ,較佳至少兩輪158安裝在輪板144,電路30較佳包含至少 兩同軸向軌道159,而輪158可配置在其間以沿電路30順應 軌道159,此方式中,輪158較佳由軌道159法線方向中離開 軌道的移動所限制。並且,此替代方式可配合上述輪實施 例使用。 較佳,滑架係由一驅動機構(如線性馬達)所驅動,但亦 可用任何其他的適當驅動機構》參照圖1 - 8,採用一線性馬 達,較佳係沿架構件78提供多數導電線圏,以與滑架52、 5 3相關之驅動磁鐵174作磁性互相作用。較佳,各線圈包括 一電磁場,且在需要移動時,一線圈相關之一滑架的永久 性磁鐵174係設置在此相關線圈影響球形範圍内。 各磁鐵174較佳剛性連揍至其各滑架,使得磁鐵的移動產 生對應之滑架移動,如圖7所示,腳164附接至滑架5 2的交 叉構件100内侧面166。具有腳170之一 L型框架168係自腳 1料往内倚靠,一長形磁鐵174固定在腳170面對架78與電線 圈之表面172上。磁鐵174與架78外面176呈相鄰配置且相隔 ’如此安裝時,當線圈啓動且供應適合發展電磁場之電能時 ,磁鐵174係位於一或部份線圈的電磁場影響球形範圍内。 本發明的控制系統較佳爲“閉迴路’’構造,一閉迴路系統 中’以適當電能供應至各個併列對準線圈,沿一路徑對於 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) — ------1訂--— II---•線! 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 -58 A7 B7 458 9 24 五、發明說明(56 ) 閱 讀 背 之 注 意 事 項 再 填 寫 頁 所需的控制變數來控制該系統的各可移元件(如滑架)。施 至線圈的電能性質係決定系統的反應性元件呈現何種反應 。一閉迴路系統中,提供告知閉迴路系統各滑架之位置、 速度、加速度、方向、力量、扭矩、及/或顚簸或其他動作 參數之一回#裝置係用以修改進給至在已知時間與各滑架 相關之一線圈或部份線圈之電能,以產生各滑架之一所需 控制變數。來自一控制器代表各滑架所需位置/時間狀態之 輸出亦用以修改最後供予各線圈之電能,以進行各滑架在 已知時間點之一所需反應。 圖1 0代表具體.實施本發明各種特徵之一閉迴路系統,包 括多數導電線圈:線圈1 ··線圈N,其與其相鄰線圈呈電絕 緣,且以概呈併列排列相對準。圖1 〇僅顯示兩線圈:亦即 線圈1及線圈N,代表可具有以對準線圈陣列配置之任何數 量的額外線圈。 所述系統進一步包括多數可移元件(滑架)5 2.及150,其安 裝方式譬如沿界定路徑99之一軌道58長度移動,路徑99在 圖1〇中係與對準的線圈呈平行前進。雖然圖10中,對準的 線圈及軌道顯示爲實質分離,通常實際上,軌道及線圈以 大致相鄰關係配置。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 如圖1 0所示,各可移元件包含可安裝沿轨道移動之一滑 架5 2,一感測器框架310係相對一感測器條320呈操作性定 位,而一反應性元件174在圖1 〇中爲一永久性磁鐵,反應性 无件的位置與對準的線圈維持相隔一距離,而將反應性元 件置放在各啓動的線圈所發展之一電磁場影響球形範圍(請 -59 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458 9 24 a? 五、發明說明(57 ) 見圖1 0之力線322)内。可暸解圖10之力線322預定僅爲示 範且未預期精確作表力線。 根據本發明之一型態,經由一控制器326來控制各滑架, 控制器經由一電引線328或其他導通裝置電連接至一系列放 大器(圖10中標爲Amp 1、Amp 2及Amp N ),其指標顯示 Amp 2與Amp N之間可有任何數量的放大器。不論如何,較 佳對於系統的各滑架提供一放大器,各放大器設有一習知 電能供源3 3 0,譬如爲習知的三相電流(three- phase electrical current)。在放大器内,電流係修改成爲來自控制器的訊號 及/或來自感測器條320的訊號以提供輸出之一函數,來自 各放大器之輸出係進給入一線圈切換電路332,對於線圈切 換電路之輸入係供至各線圈以發展此線圈相關之一電磁場 ,電磁場性質爲供至線圈之修改後電能的一函數。 圖10中,各線圈描述爲包括一電磁場,一滑架之一永久 性磁鐵174在圖中與一線圈相關並配置在此相關線圈的影響 球形範園内,各磁鐵係剛性連接至其各滑架,使得磁鐵的 移動產生其滑架之相對應移動,圖1 〇所示的滑架係可移式 安裝在與對準的線圈概呈平行配置之一轨道58上。 —已知次總成的各軌道較佳與對準線圈陣列的路徑係呈 平行配置,且較佳與線圈呈相鄭配置。此方式中,各滑架 可包括一相關的永久性磁鐵(或電磁鐵或感應器),此磁鐵 或感應器係在數個啓動線圈的電磁場的影響球形範園之内 ,而可具有對於滑架之所需控制變數。本發明之線圈爲本 技藝所熟悉、且僅概括及共同顯示於圖中。 -60- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規袼(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填貧本頁) i ----訂---------線1^7---------------------- 458924 Λ7 —________B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(58 ) 如圖11A所示,一較佳實施例中,對準的線圈係分成段 340、342及344、346 ’界定一線性段之該等線圈係包含段 340、342,界定一第一彎段之其他線圈係包含段344,而其 他線圈界疋一第—弯段346。若有不同半徑之多個彎段,已 知半徑之各段係包含一段。因此,若有多個不同半徑之彎 段’已知半控之各段係包含一段,但多個彎段亦可構成一 單段。對準線圈陣列之長度尺寸可爲任何方便的形式、且 可包括至少一直線段及至少一彎段或一連續改變曲率(孽如苜 蓿葉設計),如圖11A所示,線圈可對準形成一連續陣列。 本發明的系統中,各滑架沿其各路徑(沿各軌道)所需移 動之程式係輪入控制器中。在適當時間,來自控制器之輸 出訊號係供應至各個多數放大器,較佳對於各滑架提供一 放大器,JL經由其相關放大器供應一已知滑架移動之所有 指示。一般而言,來自一已知放大器的輸出係供應至一線 圈切換電路332,線圈切換電路332將放大器輸出供應至在 已知時間點與所述放大器相關的滑架有關之適當線圈。自 線圈切換電路接收訊號時,所影響的線圈係產生適當的各 別電磁場,所述滑架相關之磁鐵係位於線圈電磁場影響球 形範園内,而接收來自放大器經由線圈切換電路之輸出。 各滑架的磁鐵係對於電磁場起反應,以使滑架保持靜態、 或使其沿路控移至一新位置。 圖1 4中,顯示三滑架系統所用之本控制系統之實施例, 但僅顯示滑架1及3。所示系統包括一第一部份的三個線圈 1A' 2B&3C,一第二部份的三個線圈4A、5B及6c。各 -61 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填貧本頁w IM. n ----訂---------線! 4^8 9 24 A7 B7 五、發明說明(59 ) 滑架的所描述長度係指用以獲得適當線圈切換之各滑架相 關的永久性磁鐵174所需長度。圖示實施例中,此長度係延 伸在三個線圈上方,所述系統進一步包括一電能供源33〇 , 其在圖14中爲三相電力源。電能係由一放大器(各滑架相關 之AMP1、AMP2、AMP3)及一控制器326作修改,如圖所示 ,圖14中,SW11A係指對於放大器1、線圈1及相a之一開 關,以類似方式,SW13C係指放大器1、線圈3及相C之一 開關。 對於各線圈的“開啓’’點係爲當一滑架的引緣334與一區( 亦即圖1 4所示之區1 - 8 )的起點相交時。對於各線圈的“關 閉’’點係爲當一滑架的尾緣336與一區的起點相交時。圖χ 4 中’ SW37 A在圖中顯示爲+關閉,各放大器的輸出包含電能 之修改的相A、B、C。對於第一放大器,AMP1,其相A可 經由開關SW11A電連接至第一组線圈之線圈1 A,其相B可 經由開關SW12B電連接至第一組線圈之線圈2 B,其相C可 經由開關SW13C電連接至第一組線圈之線圈3C。並且,第 一放大器的相A係經由開關SW14A電連接至第二組之線圈 4 A ’其相B可經由開關SW15B電連接至第二組線圈之線圏 5 B ’其相C可經由開關S W.l 6C電連接至第二組線圈之線圈 6C。 對於第二放大器,AMP2,其相A可經由開關SW21A電連 接至第一组線圈之線圈1 A,其相B可經由開關SW22B電連 接至第一組線圈之線圈2B,其相C可經由開關SW23C電連 接至第一組線圈之線圈3 C。 -62- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 f請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} σ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ------—訂------------------------------ 4 5 五 8924 發明說明(60 ) 對於第三放大器,AMP3,其相A可經由開關SW31A電連 接至第一组線圈之線圈1 A,其相B可經由開關SW32B電連 接至第一组線圈之線圈2B,其相c可經由開關SW33C電連 接至第一組線圈之線圈3 C。 藉由暸解三個放大器對於第一組線圈的三個線圈的上述 電連接,在任何已知時間,第一组線圈之這三個線圈可由 三個放大器其中任一者供應動力。 作業時,當滑架1的引端334通入區2時,開關SW11A係關 閉,使線圈1 A能由關閉的開關SwilA自AMP1接收電能, 並產生與滑架相關的永久性磁鐵起反應之一電磁場。根據 從放大器AMP1供入電能的性質,此反應可包含使滑架j維 持靜態或驅使滑架1在一往前或往後方向移動,以任何速度 作加速度或負加速度運動,及/或以一已知力量移動,或者 這些動作參數之組合。假設滑架i往前驅動,當其引緣334 進入區3時,線圈2 B啓動時係關閉開關SW125,並發展配 合線圈1A的磁場之一電磁場。 對於滑架3,圖1 4中,此滑架描述爲配置在區5 _ 8内,滑 架3的引端334描述爲具有進入區8,而其尾端336描述爲已 通過區5的起點。這些環境下,開關SW34A已經開啓,關閉 線圈4 A的電能流動,當開關SW35B及SW36C(其在滑架3引 端1 3 4通過各區6及7的起點時係爲關閉)保持關閉,故電能 繼續流至線圈5B及6C。已知若開關37A於圖1 4中描述,此 開關將關閉。 .參照圖7及1 2,可由霍爾效應感測器實行圖1 4常見之 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填k本頁)V. Description of the Invention (54) The printed wheel plate 144 of the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is preferably installed on the feet 102 and 128 by pins 151 arranged perpendicularly to the outside of the feet 102 and 128, and can be oriented toward and away from the feet. 2. One of the outer directions of 128 is slightly retracted in or out to accommodate the track's departure from the track geometry, which is inconsistent or misaligned, or any other minor defect of the track configuration. Therefore, the positioning of the carriage along the track has some margin, especially within the portion where the straight section in the track is transformed into a curved section of the track. In addition, the wheel plate 144 has a recessed cutout 149 which faces the outside of the first and second feet 102 and 128 and can be telescopically moved to or away from the outer end of the carriage, even if the rails of the rails 58 and 60 are improperly spaced or sideways. Improperly parallel, this telescopic feature can also make the carriage travel smoothly. The track followers can be spaced on opposite sides of the carriage to accommodate imperfections in non-parallel tracks. In addition, a set of wheels attached to one side of the carriage may have a flat profile, so that the wheels can be flatly carried along the rail and can move laterally relative to the rail c. Refer to Figures 2 5 B and 2 5 C In another embodiment, a set of wheels 155 (preferably including four wheels) are attached to one side of the carriage, and the wheel 55 has a -flat profile so that the wheels can be carried flatly along a track 156. Preferably, the track 156 also has a Flat outline to fit the shape of wheel 155. During operation, the wheel 155 conforms to the track 156 along the path, but can be moved laterally relative to the track 156 to accommodate—the imperfections of a track that is not substantially parallel and has a varying pitch. Other shapes of the wheel 155 and the track 156 may be used in other embodiments, such as to ease the profile rather than flat or grooved. Preferably, the track 156 has a runway or track 157 on the outer surface, and the outer surface 158 of the wheel 155 has a shape corresponding to the track 157. In addition, the wheel 155 and the track 156 may have different shapes. For example, the wheel 155 may be flat as shown in FIG. 25B, and the track 156 may be similar to the tracks 58 and 60 as truncated as shown in FIG. 11A, and have similar tracks. The track of 140 and 142, therefore, the wheel 155 can be flat (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)----- Order --------- Line — ϋ -57- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 is now available (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 458 924 V. Description of the invention (55 Tan bearing on the 140,142 can move sideways relative to the rails 140,142, while preventing the carriage It is radially separated from the track for the path, so that the carriage keeps the path. Referring to FIG. 25D, another embodiment of the carriage wheel 158 is shown. In this embodiment, at least two wheels 158 are preferably installed on the wheel plate 144. The circuit 30 preferably includes at least two coaxial orbits 159, and the wheel 158 may be arranged therebetween to conform to the track 159 along the circuit 30. In this manner, the wheel 158 is preferably restricted by the movement away from the track in the normal direction of the track 159. This alternative method can be used in conjunction with the above wheel embodiment. Preferably, the carriage is driven by a drive mechanism (such as a wire Motor), but any other suitable driving mechanism can also be used. With reference to Figures 1-8, a linear motor is used, preferably most of the conductive wires 沿 are provided along the frame member 78 to be related to the carriages 52, 53. The driving magnets 174 magnetically interact with each other. Preferably, each coil includes an electromagnetic field, and when it is necessary to move, a permanent magnet 174 related to one of the carriages of a coil is arranged within the range of the spherical shape of the relevant coil. Good rigidity is connected to each of its carriages, so that the movement of the magnet will cause the corresponding carriage movement. As shown in FIG. 7, the foot 164 is attached to the inner side 166 of the cross member 100 of the carriage 52. There is one L of the foot 170 The profile frame 168 leans inward from the foot 1. A long magnet 174 is fixed on the surface 172 of the foot 170 facing the frame 78 and the electric coil. The magnet 174 and the outer surface 176 of the frame 78 are arranged adjacent to each other and are separated from each other. When the coil is activated and the electric energy suitable for the development of the electromagnetic field is supplied, the magnet 174 is located within a spherical range affected by the electromagnetic field of one or a part of the coil. The control system of the present invention is preferably a "closed loop" structure in a closed loop system. Supply the appropriate electrical energy to each parallel alignment coil, and follow a path for (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) — ------ 1 order --- II --- • line! Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives-58 A7 B7 458 9 24 V. Description of the Invention (56) Read the notes on the back and fill in the control variables required to control the movable elements (such as the carriage) of the system. Apply to the coil The nature of the electrical energy determines how the reactive elements of the system behave. In a closed-loop system, it is used to inform the closed-loop system of the position, speed, acceleration, direction, force, torque, and / or one of the bumps or other motion parameters. The device is used to modify the feed to the existing position. The time is related to the power of one coil or part of the coils associated with each carriage to generate the required control variable for each carriage. The output from a controller representing the required position / time status of each carriage is also used to modify the power supplied to each coil at last to perform the required response of each carriage at a known time point. Fig. 10 represents a specific implementation of one of the various features of the present invention. A closed-loop system includes a plurality of conductive coils: coil 1 · coil N, which is electrically insulated from its adjacent coils and aligned in a roughly parallel arrangement. Figure 10 shows only two coils: coil 1 and coil N, representing any number of additional coils that can be arranged in an array of aligned coils. The system further includes a plurality of movable elements (carriages) 5 2. and 150. The installation method, for example, moves along the length of one of the rails 58 defining a path 99. The path 99 is parallel to the aligned coil in FIG. 10 . Although the aligned coils and tracks are shown as being substantially separated in FIG. 10, in general, the tracks and coils are generally arranged in a substantially adjacent relationship. The consumer cooperation of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is printed as shown in Fig. 10. Each movable element includes a carriage 5 2 that can be installed to move along the track. A sensor frame 310 is relative to a sensor bar 320. Operational positioning, while a reactive element 174 is a permanent magnet in FIG. 10, the position of the reactive element is kept at a distance from the aligned coil, and the reactive element is placed at each activated coil. One of the developments The electromagnetic field affects the spherical range (please -59 This paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Gongchu)) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 458 9 24 a? (57) See inside the force line 322 of 10). It can be understood that the force line 322 of FIG. 10 is intended to be exemplary only and the exact force line is not expected. According to a form of the present invention, each carriage is controlled by a controller 326, and the controller is electrically connected to a series of amplifiers through an electrical lead 328 or other conducting devices (labeled Amp 1, Amp 2 and Amp N in FIG. 10) Its indicators show that there can be any number of amplifiers between Amp 2 and Amp N. In any case, it is better to provide an amplifier for each carriage of the system, and each amplifier is provided with a conventional power source 3 3 0, such as a conventional three-phase electrical current. In the amplifier, the current is modified as a function of the signal from the controller and / or the signal from the sensor strip 320 to provide an output. The output from each amplifier is fed into a coil switching circuit 332. For the coil switching circuit The input is supplied to each coil to develop an electromagnetic field associated with the coil. The nature of the electromagnetic field is a function of the modified electrical energy supplied to the coil. In FIG. 10, each coil is described as including an electromagnetic field. A permanent magnet 174 of a carriage is associated with a coil in the figure and is arranged in the influence spherical circle of the relevant coil. Each magnet is rigidly connected to each of its carriages. In order to make the movement of the magnet produce the corresponding movement of the carriage, the carriage shown in FIG. 10 is removably installed on a rail 58 arranged in parallel with the aligned coil. -The tracks of the known sub-assembly are preferably arranged in parallel with the path of the alignment coil array, and are preferably arranged in phase with the coil. In this way, each carriage may include an associated permanent magnet (or electromagnet or inductor), which is within the influence of the electromagnetic field of several starting coils, and may have Required control variables of the rack. The coils of the present invention are familiar to the art and are only summarized and collectively shown in the figure. -60- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling the poor page) i ---- Order ------- --Line 1 ^ 7 ---------------------- 458924 Λ7 —________ B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (58) As shown in FIG. 11A, in a preferred embodiment, the aligned coil system is divided into segments 340, 342, and 344, 346. 'The coil systems defining a linear segment include segments 340, 342, and other defining a first curved segment. The coil system includes a segment 344, and the other coil boundaries are a first-bent segment 346. If there are multiple curved segments with different radii, each segment of the known radius includes a segment. Therefore, if there are multiple curved segments with different radii ', each segment of the known semi-control system includes one segment, but multiple curved segments can also constitute a single segment. The length dimension of the alignment coil array can be any convenient form, and can include at least a straight line segment and at least one curved segment or a continuously changing curvature (such as alfalfa leaf design). As shown in FIG. 11A, the coils can be aligned to form a Continuous array. In the system of the present invention, the program that each carriage needs to move along its path (along each track) is wheeled into the controller. At the appropriate time, the output signal from the controller is supplied to each of the majority of amplifiers, preferably an amplifier is provided for each carriage, and JL provides all indications of a known carriage movement via its associated amplifier. In general, the output from a known amplifier is supplied to a coil switching circuit 332, which supplies the amplifier output to an appropriate coil associated with a carriage associated with the amplifier at a known point in time. When a signal is received from the coil switching circuit, the affected coil system generates appropriate respective electromagnetic fields. The magnets associated with the carriage are located in the spherical electromagnetic field affected by the coil electromagnetic field, and receive the output from the amplifier via the coil switching circuit. The magnet system of each carriage reacts to the electromagnetic field to keep the carriage static or move it to a new position along the road. In Fig. 14, an embodiment of the control system used in the three-slide system is shown, but only the carriages 1 and 3 are shown. The system shown comprises three coils 1A '2B & 3C of a first part and three coils 4A, 5B and 6c of a second part. Each -61-This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the poor page w IM. N ---- Order ---- ----- Line! 4 ^ 8 9 24 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (59) The described length of the carriage refers to the required length of the permanent magnet 174 associated with each carriage to obtain the proper coil switching. In the illustrated embodiment, this length extends over three coils. The system further includes an electrical energy source 33, which is a three-phase power source in FIG. 14. The electrical energy is provided by an amplifier (AMP1 associated with each carriage). , AMP2, AMP3) and a controller 326. As shown in the figure, SW11A refers to the switch for amplifier 1, coil 1 and phase a. In a similar manner, SW13C refers to amplifier 1, coil 3 And one of the switches of phase C. The "open" point for each coil is when the leading edge 334 of a carriage intersects with the starting point of a zone (ie, zones 1-8 shown in Fig. 14). For each The "close" point of the coil is when the trailing edge 336 of a carriage intersects with the starting point of a zone. 'SW37 A is shown as + OFF in the figure χ 4 The output of each amplifier contains the modified phases A, B, and C of the electrical energy. For the first amplifier, AMP1, its phase A can be electrically connected to the coil 1 A of the first set of coils via switch SW11A, and its phase B can be switched via SW12B The coil 2 B electrically connected to the coil of the first group, the phase C thereof can be electrically connected to the coil 3C of the coil of the first group via the switch SW13C. Moreover, the phase A of the first amplifier is electrically connected to the coil of the second group via the switch SW14A. 4 A 'its phase B can be electrically connected to the coil of the second group of coils via switch SW15B 5 B' its phase C can be electrically connected to the coil of the second group of coils 6C via switch SW16C. For the second amplifier, AMP2, Its phase A can be electrically connected to the coil 1 A of the first group of coils via a switch SW21A, its phase B can be electrically connected to the coil 2B of the first group of coils via a switch SW22B, and its phase C can be electrically connected to the first group of coils via a switch SW23C Coil of the coil 3 C. -62- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) f Please read the notes on the back before filling this page} σ Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printing -------- Order -------------------- ---------- 4 5 Wu 8924 Invention description (60) For the third amplifier, AMP3, its phase A can be electrically connected to the coil 1 A of the first group of coils via switch SW31A, and its phase B can be The switch SW32B is electrically connected to the coil 2B of the first group of coils, and the phase c thereof can be electrically connected to the coil 3 C of the first group of coils through the switch SW33C. By knowing the above electrical connections of the three amplifiers to the three coils of the first set of coils, the three coils of the first set of coils can be powered by any of the three amplifiers at any given time. During operation, when the leading end 334 of the carriage 1 enters the zone 2, the switch SW11A is closed, so that the coil 1 A can receive power from the AMP1 by the closed switch SwilA, and generate a permanent magnet related to the carriage. An electromagnetic field. Depending on the nature of the electrical energy supplied from the amplifier AMP1, this reaction may include keeping the carriage j static or driving the carriage 1 in a forward or backward direction, with acceleration or negative acceleration at any speed, and / or Known force movements, or a combination of these action parameters. Assume that the carriage i is driven forward. When the leading edge 334 enters the zone 3, when the coil 2 B starts, the switch SW125 is closed, and an electromagnetic field matching the magnetic field of the coil 1A is developed. For the carriage 3, in FIG. 14, this carriage is described as being arranged in the zone 5_8, the leading end 334 of the carriage 3 is described as having the entry zone 8, and its trailing end 336 is described as the starting point of the zone 5 which has passed. . Under these circumstances, the switch SW34A has been turned on, closing the power flow of the coil 4 A, and the switches SW35B and SW36C (which are closed when the carriage 3 leads 1 3 4 pass through the starting points of the zones 6 and 7) remain closed, so Power continues to flow to coils 5B and 6C. It is known that if the switch 37A is described in Fig. 14, this switch will be closed. . Refer to Figures 7 and 12, which can be implemented by Hall effect sensors. Figures 4 and 4 are common (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

M 11 -Jl? 1111111 I I 11 — 11 I — I — 11 — — — —---I — 11 63· Α7 9 24 -_____Β7____ 五、發明說明(61 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 各開關SWXXX的開啓及關閉,可由安裝在滑架5 2上之感測 器框架310的軛314腳或板318上的一磁鐵343來觸發霍爾效 應感測器341 ^磁鐵343的南極係在圖1 2平面往外、且其北 極進入圖12平面中並操作性鄰近譬如安裝在印刷電路板323 上之各霍爾效應感測器341,各霍爾效應感測器可與一動力 開關(三端雙向開關(triac)、電晶體或其他)相關,當如本技 藝已知使一滑架移動超過其各別霍爾效應感測器時,動力 開關打開一線圈,故可使一放大器將線圈的電能進給至已 知開關相關的線圈》所示實施例中顯示三個此等霍爾效應 感測器:一第一滑架用之一感測器341、一第二滑架用之— 第二感測器345、及一第三滑架用之一第三感測器347。因 爲磁鐵的空間位置對於印刷電路板上的各別霍爾感測器空 間位置安裝在感測器框架310上,各感測器係針對其各別滑 架。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖12、1 3、15b所示的實施例中,磁鐵352包含多數對準 的磁鐵,其極郅係沿磁鐵長度相交錯,此磁鐵352在其各別 滑架上的方向使其長度尺寸平行於其各排霍爾效應感測器 之長度尺寸β因此,如圖12及15B所示,磁鐵352沿其路捏 的移動係通過其各排之各別霍爾效應感測器(圖15Β中之感 測器516)。當磁鐵352通過感測器且這些訊號進給至一訊號 解碼器而產生供予一驅動器之頻道Α及頻道Β等輸出時,係 產生一系列的正弦-餘弦訊號。熟悉本技藝者瞭解其他型感 測器及/或回饋裝置,且其同樣適用於本發明,譬如美國專利 5,·965,963號所述者,其内容以提及方式明確併入本文中。 -64 -M 11 -Jl? 1111111 II 11 — 11 I — I — 11 — — — — --- I — 11 63 · Α7 9 24 -_____ Β7 ____ V. Description of the invention (61) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this (Page) Each switch SWXXX can be turned on and off by the yoke 314 of the sensor frame 310 mounted on the carriage 52 or a magnet 343 on the plate 318 to trigger the Hall effect sensor 341 ^ South pole of the magnet 343 It is located outside the plane of FIG. 12 and its north pole enters the plane of FIG. 12 and is operatively adjacent to each Hall effect sensor 341 mounted on a printed circuit board 323, for example. Each Hall effect sensor can be connected with a power switch. (Triac, triac, or other) related, when a carriage is moved beyond its respective Hall effect sensor as known in the art, the power switch opens a coil, so an amplifier can be Feeding the coil's power to a known switch-related coil "Three such Hall-effect sensors are shown in the embodiment shown: one for the first carriage, one for the sensor 341, and one for the second carriage Among them—the second sensor 345 and a third sensor 347 for a third carriage. Because the spatial positions of the magnets are mounted on the sensor frame 310 for the individual Hall sensor spatial positions on the printed circuit board, each sensor is directed to its respective carriage. In the embodiment shown in Figures 12, 1, 3, and 15b printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the magnets 352 include most aligned magnets, the poles of which are staggered along the length of the magnets. The direction of the carriage is such that its length dimension is parallel to the length dimension β of each row of Hall-effect sensors. Therefore, as shown in Figs. 12 and 15B, the movement of the magnet 352 along its path passes through each of its rows. Hall effect sensor (sensor 516 in Figure 15B). A series of sine-cosine signals are generated when the magnet 352 passes the sensor and these signals are fed to a signal decoder to produce channels A and B for a driver. Those skilled in the art know other types of sensors and / or feedback devices, and they are also applicable to the present invention, such as those described in US Patent No. 5,965,963, the contents of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference. -64-

A7 B7 ‘"458924 五、發明說明(位 —“閉迴路’’控制系統中,鄰近路徑9 9及沿其移動之滑架 提供一偵測裝置,以偵測所有已知時間沿路徑之各滑架位 置。較佳’使用類似感測器亦可偵測其他參數(譬如移動方 向、速度、加速度、力量、扭矩、及/或顚薇或各滑架之其 他動作參數)。參照圖9-15,本發明適用的回馈裝置的一 實施例中’―霍爾效應感測器陣列35〇係安裝在印刷電路板 323上而與沿軌道移動的滑架之感測器框架31〇軛323腳318 上安裝的另一磁鐵3 52呈功能性相鄰^此陣列包括排成三列 354、356、3 58之多數霍爾效應感測器,其在印刷電路板上 與軌道60長度尺寸相對準,而每個滑架具有一排。這些各 排霍爾效應感測器彼此相隔,磁鐵352安裝在各滑架上的位 置使得:滑架的移動係將其磁鐵移動超過代表所述滑架之 該排霍爾效應感測器。 圖13所示實施例中,磁鐵352包含多數相對準的磁鐵,其 極部沿磁鐵長度相交錯》此磁鐵352在其各別滑架上的方向 使其長度尺寸平行於其各排霍爾效應感測器的長度尺寸。 因此,如圖15所示,譬如,磁鐵352超過其各排354的各別 霍爾效應感測器之相對移動係產生供至一訊號解碼器36〇之 系列的正弦餘弦訊號,訊號解碼器36〇則產生供予一伺服 放大器而標爲頻道A及頻道B之輸出。熟悉本技藝者係暸解 其他型感測器及/或回饋裝置,此外,可使用磁致伸縮性或 磁致電阻性感測器而非霍爾效應感測器,來決定滑架在軌 道上之位置及其他參數。 •如圖15A所示,可由多工方式提供更佳的控制系統,如圖 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) i+Ί--------t---------線 —A7 B7 '" 458924 V. Description of the invention (bit-in the "closed loop" control system, a detection device is provided adjacent to the path 9 9 and the carriage moving along it to detect all known time along the path. Carriage position. It is better to use other similar sensors to detect other parameters (such as movement direction, speed, acceleration, force, torque, and / or other movement parameters of Suwei or each carriage). Refer to Figure 9- 15. In one embodiment of the feedback device applicable to the present invention, the 'Hall-effect sensor array 35o is mounted on the printed circuit board 323 and the sensor frame 31 of the carriage moving along the track 31o 323 feet Another magnet 3 52 mounted on 318 is functionally adjacent ^ This array includes a majority of Hall-effect sensors arranged in three columns 354, 356, 3 58 which are aligned with the length of the track 60 on the printed circuit board Each carriage has a row. These rows of Hall-effect sensors are separated from each other, and the positions of the magnets 352 on each carriage are such that the movement of the carriage moves its magnets more than the one representing the carriage. This row of Hall-effect sensors is shown in Figure 13. In the embodiment, the magnet 352 includes most aligned magnets whose poles are staggered along the length of the magnet. The direction of the magnet 352 on its respective carriage is such that its length is parallel to that of its rows of Hall-effect sensors. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15, for example, the relative movement of the magnet Hall 352 over the respective Hall effect sensors of each row 354 generates a series of sine and cosine signals for a signal decoder 36. The decoder 36 generates output for a servo amplifier labeled channel A and channel B. Those skilled in the art should know other types of sensors and / or feedback devices. In addition, magnetostriction or magnetostriction can be used. Resistive sensors, not Hall-effect sensors, determine the position of the carriage on the track and other parameters. As shown in Figure 15A, a better control system can be provided by multiplexing, as shown in the figure (please read first Note on the back then fill in this page) i + Ί -------- t --------- line —

J 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 杜 印 製 -65- 458924 A7 B7 五、發明說明(63 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 15A所示’控制系統之此實施例中,用以感測滑架在路徑上 的位置之多數感測器516係與一多工器576爲操作性相關, 多數引線577係與多工器576相關,各滑架有一個引線。經 由夕工器576供應訊號之後’這些引線577係承載可爲霍爾 效應裝置之位置感測器516提供的訊號。一訊號解碼器578 可較佳與各引線577相關以對來自多工器576之訊號進行解 碼、然後進给至多數放大器598。放大器598係與動作控制 器588或指揮放大器598對於線圈508提供特定訊號之動作控 制電腦呈操作性相關。微控制器574發訊给切換電路538中 之多數動力開關以開啓及/或關閉。這些開關係開啓及關閉 以啓動線性馬達的線圈508組,如圖1 4所詳述。此系统中, 可利用霍爾效應感測器來開啓及關閉各開關,而霍爾效應 感測器則由各滑架5 2、5 3上安裝的一磁鐵343所觸發。採 用多工方式則可使用較少的感測器,多工系統所用之一感 測器陣列係顯示於圖15B中,切換感測器512與一第一軸線 相關’切換感測器514則與所有其他軸線相關。這些切換感 測器512、514係與一偏移對齊部518相關,偏移對齊部518 則與一微控制器電路板574相關,一微控制器電路板係與切 換電路538相關,使得放大器598受到切換感測器5 12、514 所觸發’以對各線圈508提供動力。亦可用其他型的控制系 統及感測器,本發明不限於上述説明。 參照圖1 5 Β ’感測器圖示用於一多工的控制系統,印刷 電路板32;3圖示具有一彎曲路徑上沿板3 23表面定位之多數 感測器陣列,印刷電路板323較佳位於板324下方或上方而 -66, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 閱 面 之 注 項 I k t I 訂 1α 458924 A7 B7 五、發明說明(64 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印J Consumption Cooperation of Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-65- 458924 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (63) In this embodiment of the control system shown in Figure 15A printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Most of the sensors 516 that measure the position of the carriage on the path are related to a multiplexer 576. Most of the leads 577 are related to the multiplexer 576. Each carriage has a lead. After the signal is supplied by the electric machine 576 ', these leads 577 carry signals which can be provided to the position sensor 516 of the Hall effect device. A signal decoder 578 may preferably be associated with each lead 577 to decode the signal from the multiplexer 576 and then feed the majority of the amplifiers 598. The amplifier 598 is operatively related to the motion control computer 588 or the command amplifier 598 for providing a specific signal to the coil 508's motion control computer. The microcontroller 574 signals most power switches in the switching circuit 538 to turn on and / or off. These open relationships are turned on and off to activate the 508 sets of coils of the linear motor, as detailed in Figure 14. In this system, each switch can be turned on and off using a Hall effect sensor, and the Hall effect sensor is triggered by a magnet 343 mounted on each of the carriages 5 2, 5 3. In the multiplexing method, fewer sensors can be used. One of the sensor arrays used in the multiplexing system is shown in FIG. 15B. The switching sensor 512 is related to a first axis. The switching sensor 514 is related to All other axes are related. These switching sensors 512 and 514 are related to an offset alignment section 518, and the offset alignment section 518 is related to a microcontroller circuit board 574, and a microcontroller circuit board is related to the switching circuit 538, so that the amplifier 598 Triggered by switching sensors 5 12, 514 'to power each coil 508. Other types of control systems and sensors can also be used, and the invention is not limited to the above description. 1 5 Β ′ The sensor illustrates a control system for a multiplex, a printed circuit board 32; 3 illustrates a sensor array with a plurality of sensors positioned along a curved path along the surface of the board 3 23, a printed circuit board 323 It is preferably located below or above the plate 324 and -66. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love). Note on the front I kt I Order 1α 458924 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (64 ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

王卵形、且與軌道5 8、60呈—體配置。首兩排係包括線圈 切換感測器,其用以當感測器通過切換磁鐵343時將線圈切 開及切閉。一第一排包括感測器512,其爲—第一滑架所用 t切換感測器,一第二排包括感測器514,其爲所有其餘滑 架所用之切換感測器。對於第一感測器,切換磁鐵343位於 板3 18上,使其沿第一排感測器512界定的路徑行進。對於 弟一至第11滑架,切換磁鐵343位於板318上,使其沿第二排 感測器514界定的路徑行進。除了一切換磁鐵343之外,— 加碼器磁鐵352亦設置在各滑架上,加碼器磁鐫352在一第 三排感測器516上行進,此排中,對於各陣列提供四個加碼 器霍爾效應感測器。使用感測器516來決定各滑架沿軌道5 8 ' 60之位置,加碼器磁鐵352位於各加碼器板318上,如圖 1 2及15Β相比較顯示,使用多工可比非多工系統具有更少 排感測器,應暸解可採用不只一個電路板。 切換磁鐵343較佳具有延伸而同時覆蓋至少一個、較佳兩 個感測器之一長度,其中感測器位置係在磁鐵343端點下方 。加碼器磁鐵352較佳具有延伸覆蓋位置感測器516陣列之 至少兩完整長度之一長度。如圖15Β所示,當加碼器叔318 經過印刷電路板323的曲線部份時,磁鐵352及343繼續接合 其各別的感測器陣列。 另外,可添加或取代霍爾效應感測器而採用磁致伸縮性 感測器,來自磁致伸縮性感測器的回饋訊號可用於自導引 、換向校準 '或其他參數感測。譬如,另一實施例中,至 少一磁致伸縮性感測器可沿引導可移式元件或滑架之路徑 -67- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4规格mo X 297公釐) 458924 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印親 五、發明說明(65 ) 商己置’控制器係與各感測器及各可移式元件呈操作性相關 ,控制器係自代表至少一相關可移式元件的至少_動作參 數之一感測器接收至少一訊號。動作參數爲至少—個下列 動作變數:位置、方向、速度、或加速度及其他。此實施 例中,當可移式元件產生動作時,磁致伸縮性感測器可提 供絕對位置資料。並且,可移式元件靜止時,感測器可提 供滑架之電性或變向校準及/或自導引。建議路徑上以重疊 構造設有多數磁致伸縮性感測器,但亦可利用單一感測器 。一較佳實施例中,一磁鐵係與各可移式元件相關二與磁 致伸縮性感測器呈操作性相關。 另一實施例中,沿路徑配置至少一磁致伸縮性感測器、 且沿路徑配置至少一非絕對回饋感測器,控制器係與各感 測器及各可移式元件呈操作性相關,控制器自代表至少一 相關的可移式元件的至少一動作參數之一個感測器接收至 少一訊號。非絕對回饋感測器選自下列各物:霍爾效應感 測器、步進及方向感測器、增量感測器、或磁致電阻性感 測器。建議可採用單一感測器以提供回精,故可達成滑架 之換向校準及自導引,但可以重疊構造來使用多數感測器 。可移式元件亦較佳包括與各磁致伸縮性感測器呈操作性 相關之一第一磁鐵’及與各非絕對回饋感測器呈操作性相 關之一第二磁鐵。此外,非絕對回饋感測器可爲多工式, 如圖15A所示。 控制器可設有電連接至—控制器之至少一個數位訊號處 理器(DSP) ’另外,DSP可由分開的邏輯裝置取代,譬如計 -68- -11 111 "-1! - I — ---I ^ --------I I \ . (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填貧本頁) ?- α 本紙張尺度適財關家標準(CNS)A4規格⑵^ 297公釐) A7 4 58 924 ____B7__ 五、發明說明(66 ) 數器、閂鎖、振盪器、選擇器、及處理器。 建議的磁致伸縮性感測器購自美國北卡州凱瑞的MTS系 統公司之Temposonics®III, Model L series(LD)。亦可採用其 他得自MTS之磁致伸縮性感測器,譬如具有一波導相隔的 大多數感測器電子裝置。推薦的DSP係購自德州儀器的型 號 TMS320F243。 本發明包括在開始、停頓、移動方向的改變、選擇速度 、力量或加速度、或其組合、及/或滑架置放狀態(未移動) '或其他動作參數、及滑架所附接载具内所載的紙箱之一 大致有限组合中,沿軌道移動各滑架之能力。在進行一製 造作業或類似物的本系統特定實施例中,已知滑架沿軌道 長度的理想位置可在已知時間設於控制器的程式中。 本發明的系統作業之一實施例中,先決定各滑架的起始 位置,可對於各滑架採用一“自導引”位置或藉由本文所述 感測器系統(其藉由將代表各滑架沿軌道的位置之一電訊號 進給至控制器,而提供各滑架沿軌道之精確位置),來進行 此功能。 控制器内,可對各滑架提供一輪廓,其爲代表滑架與其 軌道之間位置與時間的理想關係之一表,各滑架的理想路 徑以相隔3 - 4ms的數百個點在表中描述。另外,可由演算法 、等式、或其他型表及其他方式提供此資訊。本控制系統 的最簡單型式中係對一滑架提供單一指令,基本上告知滑 架需在指定時間内從一位置移到另一位置,經由感測器來 監測各滑架順從該指令,且視需要將矯正供至滑架。 -69 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑵Q χ挪公爱) (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) i ----訂---------線! 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 五、發明說明(67The king is ovoid and is in the same configuration with the orbits 5 8, 60. The first two rows include a coil switching sensor, which is used to cut and close the coil when the sensor passes the switching magnet 343. A first row includes sensors 512, which are t-switching sensors for the first carriage, and a second row includes sensors 514, which are switching sensors for all the remaining carriages. For the first sensor, the switching magnet 343 is located on the plate 318 so that it follows the path defined by the first row of sensors 512. For the first to eleventh carriages, the switching magnet 343 is located on the plate 318 so that it follows the path defined by the second row of sensors 514. In addition to a switching magnet 343, — a coder magnet 352 is also provided on each carriage. The coder magnet 352 travels in a third row of sensors 516. In this row, four coders are provided for each array. Hall effect sensor. The sensor 516 is used to determine the position of each carriage along the track 5 8 '60. The encoder magnet 352 is located on each encoder plate 318. As shown in the comparison of Figures 12 and 15B, the use of multiplexing is comparable to that of non-multiplexing systems. Fewer sensors, know that more than one circuit board can be used. The switching magnet 343 preferably has a length that extends while covering at least one, preferably two sensors, wherein the position of the sensor is below the end of the magnet 343. The encoder magnet 352 preferably has a length that extends over at least two complete lengths of the array of position sensors 516. As shown in Fig. 15B, as the encoder terminator 318 passes the curved portion of the printed circuit board 323, the magnets 352 and 343 continue to engage their respective sensor arrays. In addition, the magnetostrictive sensor can be added or replaced instead of the Hall effect sensor. The feedback signal from the magnetostrictive sensor can be used for self-guided, commutation calibration, or other parameter sensing. For example, in another embodiment, at least one magnetostrictive sensor can be guided along the path of the movable element or the carriage. -67- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 size mo X 297 mm) 458924 A7 B7 Consumers' cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, India 5. Proof of invention (65) The commercial controller is operationally related to each sensor and each movable element, and the controller is at least one related The sensor of at least one of the movable parameters of the movable element receives at least one signal. Action parameters are at least one of the following action variables: position, direction, speed, or acceleration and others. In this embodiment, when the movable element is in motion, the magnetostrictive sensor can provide absolute position data. In addition, when the movable element is at rest, the sensor can provide electrical or orientation calibration and / or self-guidance of the carriage. It is recommended that most magnetostrictive sensors be placed on the path in an overlapping configuration, but a single sensor may also be used. In a preferred embodiment, a magnet system is associated with each movable element, and a magnetostrictive sensor is operationally related. In another embodiment, at least one magnetostrictive sensor is arranged along the path, and at least one non-absolute feedback sensor is arranged along the path. The controller is operatively related to each sensor and each movable element. The controller receives at least one signal from a sensor representing at least one motion parameter of at least one associated movable element. The non-absolute feedback sensor is selected from the following: a Hall effect sensor, a step and direction sensor, an incremental sensor, or a magnetoresistive sensor. It is suggested that a single sensor can be used to provide reversion, so the reversal calibration and self-guidance of the carriage can be achieved, but most sensors can be used in an overlapping configuration. The movable element also preferably includes a first magnet 'associated with the operability of each magnetostrictive sensor and a second magnet associated with the operability of each non-absolute feedback sensor. In addition, the non-absolute feedback sensor may be multiplexed, as shown in FIG. 15A. The controller may be provided with at least one digital signal processor (DSP) electrically connected to the controller. In addition, the DSP may be replaced by a separate logic device, such as -68- -11 111 " -1!-I —- -I ^ -------- II \. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)?-Α This paper is suitable for financial standards (CNS) A4 size ⑵ 297 mm) A7 4 58 924 ____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (66) Counters, latches, oscillators, selectors, and processors. The proposed magnetostrictive sensor was purchased from Temposonics® III, Model L series (LD) of MTS Systems, Kerry, North Carolina, USA. Other magnetostrictive sensors from MTS can also be used, such as most sensor electronics with a waveguide separation. The recommended DSP is model TMS320F243 from Texas Instruments. The present invention includes starting, stopping, changing the direction of movement, selecting speed, force or acceleration, or a combination thereof, and / or a carriage placement state (not moved) 'or other motion parameters, and a carrier attached to the carriage The ability to move the carriages along a track in a generally limited combination of one of the cartons contained therein. In a specific embodiment of the system that performs a manufacturing operation or the like, the ideal position of the known carriage along the length of the track can be set in the program of the controller at a known time. In one embodiment of the system operation of the present invention, the starting position of each carriage is first determined. A “self-guided” position may be used for each carriage or by the sensor system described herein (which is represented by One of the positions of each carriage along the track is fed to the controller by a signal, and the precise position of each carriage along the track is provided) to perform this function. In the controller, a contour can be provided for each carriage, which is a table representing the ideal relationship between the position and time of the carriage and its track. The ideal path of each carriage is shown in the table with hundreds of points separated by 3-4ms. Description. In addition, this information can be provided by algorithms, equations, or other types of tables and other methods. The simplest version of the control system provides a single instruction for a carriage, which basically tells the carriage to move from one position to another within a specified time, and monitors each carriage for compliance with the instruction through a sensor, and Provide corrections to the carriage as needed. -69-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size ⑵Q χNuo Gongai) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) i ---- Order --------- line! Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 V. Description of Invention (67

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 可瞭解’各滑架設有一磁鐵,譬如其與一或多個霍爾效 應感測器或其他感測器相配合運作,以偵測沿其路徑長度 出現或未出現滑架。感測器產生代表已知時間的滑架位置 之一訊號(常爲電訊號)。因此,多少個滑架安裝在各軌道 上以使控制系統對任一線圈或線圈組提供電能而在該線圈 或線圈组上發展出一電磁場並在任一時間對任—或多滑架 產生一動作參數指令並不重要。譬如,可引導第一熱密封 次總成之一或多滑架移動而與第二次總成的一或多滑架相 對齊’並以移動的管之相同速度隨移動的管往前移動。同 時’各次總成的其他滑架可受指令以該移動的管相接合之 該等滑架不同之速度沿一回復行程作移動。本系統中,以 20微秒精確度(對應於6〇〇公厘/秒滑架速度之〇 〇12公厘)獲 取滑架位置,目前較佳滑架速度爲817公厘/秒。 控制器内,各滑架的偵測位置係與一已知時間沿其路徑 的理想位置相比較,藉由此比較,控制器產生一電訊號, 其最終進給至對於線圈之一電能供源(亦即放大器),然後 訊號經由一切換電路送到所述滑架電磁近處的該組線圈内 之線圈,此訊號使滑架保持靜止或使其本身沿其路徑视需 要重新定位成爲在一已知時間該滑架位於理想位置之位置 ’亦即,在已知時間,滑架沿軌道的實際位置間之差異的 改變方式,可使滑架移往其此時的理想位置,對於所有滑 架連續矯正施加滑架位置。 一實施例中,可由與預計算表偏向左或右方(見圖17)來 施加實際矯正,爲簡單起見,圖17描述僅—個滑架之數個 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再兔^..本頁) -Μ ----訂---------線| 本紙張尺度it財關家標準(CNS)A4規格(2i0_ 297公釐) -70- A7 4S^924 ^------21________ 五、發明說明(68 ) 程序循環。γ軸爲零至滑架經過該程序的—完整循環範園 又滑架位置(單位:公厘),而爲滑架將沿一閉合軌道作一 完整轉動行程之距離。X軸爲零至一循環時間的範園之時 間微秒數(圖1 7假設1000微秒循環時間)。再度爲簡單起見 ’圖17描述需要固定速度(線性位置輪廓)之一位置輪靡, 較佳,每當盡量接近理想滑架位置(圖17中稱爲位置目標) 時’係產生自感測器偵測各滑架位置之訊號,此位置對應 於X轴上在圖17稱爲時間目標的另一値。亦如圖17所示, 實際對齊位置及實際對齊時間係爲發生對齊訊號時之對應 位置及時間。對於圖1 7的第一循環,假設來自對齊感測器 的訊號係恰產生在位置目標上丑不需要矯正。第二循環中 ’對齊訊號很早出現,使得預計算表向左偏移等於時間目 標與實際時間之差異量。並且,假設不會干擾下個循環之 工作站運作’實際位置係精確配合位置目標。顯然,矯正 時僅包含一滑架循環,故消除數次猶環中過度矯正或矯正 不足時已知將造成離開程序的數缺陷產品相關之“不规則振 盛(hunting) ”。_ 再參照圖1 7,下列循環顯示來自對齊感測器的訊號遲緩 出現且如圖17所示矯正偏右之相反情形。完成各偏移之後 ,當目標位置對已知程序一直保持相同時,重新界定時間 目標。 預先計算的滑架位置輪廓係對應於代表一滑架速度與時 間之間關係之一速度輪廓,矯正期間,滑架速度略偏離預 定速度輪廓,以使滑架與偏移的表呈現同步。 -71 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再秦寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -M--------訂---------線----------------------- A7 ---------.... B7 五、發明說明(69 ) 正常情形下,所施加的最大矯正通常小於數公厘,由於 .自各滑架位置與速度對於動作控制器的回饋之高度精確, 系統係能以可接受的精確度進行數個循環。需要修改時, 適由此滑架觸發對齊訊號代表的滑架。視需要,矯正可延 至滑架循環中的一更晚時間,譬如當具有來自表偏移之最 小干擾時。並iL視需要,需要較大矯正時,可人工限制最 大矯正量,且整體矯正係分佈在滑架的數個循環上。 一作業開始時’動作控制器感測到各滑架之位置及相對 應時間,進—步根據何時自各滑架預期一對齊訊號(位置目 標)’來設定動作控制器之程式。根據本發明之一特徵,動 作控制器可知在滑架位置方面於何時預期由一對齊感測器 來接收一訊號,一實施例中,利用可程式化的視窗達成上 述作用(見圖1 8 )。第一視窗係設定在產生來自對齊感測器 之第一訊號時,且其用以指示第二視窗的開始。假設程序 中包含三個滑架,視窗長度等於分成六份之一程序猶環, 在此視窗終點係有另一視窗開啓,其長度等於分成三份之 一程序循環。各對齊訊號將大約產生於第二視窗中點處, 若第二視窗未接收對齊訊號,程序可停镇且譬如發出警告 ,發生各對齊感測器訊號時係重覆此活動,開啓等於六分 之一的循環之一视窗,且每當該視窗終點時,以等於三分 之一循環之期間來開啓另一視窗。藉由此裝置,系統可债 測一遣失的對齊訊號或多個對齊訊號。 本系統中,兩個次總成的密#爪之對齊正時及其移動而 接合移動的管形成一橫向密封係爲彳貞測在移動織物1 2上出 -72- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, each carriage has a magnet, for example, it cooperates with one or more Hall-effect sensors or other sensors to detect the presence or No carriage appears. The sensor generates a signal (often a telegram) that represents one of the carriage positions at a known time. Therefore, how many carriages are installed on each track so that the control system provides power to any coil or coil group, develops an electromagnetic field on the coil or coil group, and generates an action on any one or multiple carriages at any time. Parameter instructions are not important. For example, one or more carriages of the first heat-sealed sub-assembly can be guided to move to align with one or more carriages of the second assembly 'and move forward with the moving tube at the same speed as the moving tube. At the same time, the other carriages of each assembly can be instructed to move along a return stroke at different speeds of the carriages joined by the moving tubes. In this system, the carriage position is obtained with an accuracy of 20 microseconds (corresponding to 012 mm of the carriage speed of 600 mm / sec). Currently, the preferred carriage speed is 817 mm / sec. In the controller, the detection position of each carriage is compared with the ideal position along its path at a known time. By this comparison, the controller generates an electrical signal that is finally fed to an electrical energy source for the coil. (That is, amplifier), and then a signal is sent to the coil in the group of coils near the carriage electromagnetic through a switching circuit. This signal keeps the carriage stationary or repositions itself along a path as necessary to become a At a known time, the carriage is located at an ideal position. That is, at a known time, the difference between the actual position of the carriage along the track is changed in such a way that the carriage can be moved to its ideal position at this time. The rack is continuously corrected to apply the carriage position. In an embodiment, the actual correction can be applied to the left or right side of the pre-calculation table (see Figure 17). For simplicity, Figure 17 describes only a few of the carriages (please read the precautions on the back first) Rabbit ^ .. this page) -Μ ---- Order --------- line | This paper standard it financial standard (CNS) A4 specification (2i0_ 297 mm) -70- A7 4S ^ 924 ^ ------ 21________ V. Description of the invention (68) Program loop. The γ axis is zero to the complete cycle range of the carriage through the program and the carriage position (unit: mm), and the distance that the carriage will make a complete rotation stroke along a closed track. Fan axis time in microseconds with X-axis at zero to one cycle time (Figure 17 assumes 1000 microsecond cycle time). For the sake of simplicity again, FIG. 17 describes that one of the positions that require a fixed speed (linear position profile) is out of order. It is better, whenever it is as close as possible to the ideal carriage position (referred to as the position target in FIG. 17), self-sensing is generated. The device detects the signal of each carriage position, and this position corresponds to another frame on the X axis called a time target in FIG. 17. As also shown in FIG. 17, the actual alignment position and actual alignment time are the corresponding positions and times when an alignment signal occurs. For the first cycle of FIG. 17, it is assumed that the signal from the alignment sensor is just generated on the position target and needs no correction. In the second cycle, the 'alignment' signal appears very early, so that the leftward shift of the pre-calculation table is equal to the difference between the time target and the actual time. Moreover, it is assumed that the actual operation of the workstation in the next cycle will not interfere with the operation of the workstation. Obviously, only one carriage cycle is included in the correction. Therefore, the “irregular hunting” associated with several defective products that are known to cause departure from the process when the overcorrection or undercorrection is repeated several times. _ Referring to Figure 17 again, the following cycle shows the opposite situation where the signal from the alignment sensor appears sluggish and corrects to the right as shown in Figure 17. After completing each offset, the time target is redefined when the target position remains the same for a known procedure. The pre-calculated carriage position profile corresponds to a speed profile representing a relationship between carriage speed and time. During correction, the carriage speed deviates slightly from the predetermined speed profile to synchronize the presentation of the carriage with the offset table. -71-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before writing this page) ------ Order --------- line ----------------------- A7 --------- .... B7 V. Description of the invention (69) Under normal circumstances, the maximum correction applied is usually less than a few millimeters. Because the position and speed of each carriage are highly accurate for the feedback of the motion controller, the system can be The accepted accuracy goes through several cycles. When it is necessary to modify, it is appropriate to trigger the alignment of the carriage represented by the carriage. If necessary, corrections can be extended to a later time in the carriage cycle, such as when there is minimal interference from the table offset. If iL is required, when a large correction is needed, the maximum correction amount can be artificially limited, and the overall correction system is distributed on several cycles of the carriage. At the beginning of an operation, the motion controller senses the position and corresponding time of each carriage, and further sets the program of the motion controller according to when an alignment signal (position target) is expected from each carriage. According to a feature of the present invention, the motion controller can know when it is expected to receive a signal by an alignment sensor in terms of the position of the carriage. In one embodiment, a programmable window is used to achieve the above function (see FIG. 18) . The first window is set when the first signal from the alignment sensor is generated, and it is used to indicate the start of the second window. Assume that the program contains three carriages, and the window length is equal to one-sixth of the program cycle. At the end of this window, another window is opened, the length of which is equal to one-third of the program cycle. Each alignment signal will be generated approximately at the midpoint of the second window. If the second window does not receive an alignment signal, the program can stop and, for example, issue a warning. This event is repeated when each alignment sensor signal occurs. Opening equals six minutes. One cycle is one window, and each time the window ends, another window is opened for a period equal to one third of the cycle. With this device, the system can detect a misaligned signal or multiple aligned signals. In this system, the alignment timing of the dense claws of the two sub-assemblies and their movements to join the moving tubes to form a transverse seal system. The test is performed on the moving fabric 12 -72- This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling this page)

Μ.tr---------線 I a 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作衽印製 458924 五、發明說明(7〇 ) 現或不出現一對齊標記23之一函數,如圖i所示。因此, 來自一對齊標記偵測器2S之訊號亦配合一對相對齊密封爪 之位置而進給至控制器且進行分析。係修改供應至對齊的 密封爪相關線圈的電能以確保密封爪與管上的一對齊標記 相接合之正時。藉由此裝置,並未刻意修改管經過熱密封 站28之往前移動速度,而是,修改相對齊的密封爪定位以 容納往前移動的管之任何速度。因此,若因管中拉力變化 或因FFS機之一或多機械元件未精確運作而改變移動的管 之速度,本系統係偵測此管速度變異、並調整相對齊密封 爪之位置,如此確使密封爪在偵測一對齊標記的一函數之 時間與管相接合·»視需要’密封爪與管的接合位置不需直 接位於管上的一對齊標記,而可移動與一對齊標記相距之 一設定距離。由於本系統對於密封爪位置之彈性係爲偵測 一對齊標記及其他項目之函數,本發明可用以產生任何各 種包裝尺寸而系統不需有機械改變。 圖18Λ及18B顯示用以對齊密封爪之—較佳裝置的一範例 ,如圖示,本發明的一較佳實施例採用對齊標記23及感測 器2 5、及可程式化視窗或時間間隔,以監測滑架的移動, 如圖18A及18B所示。當一對齊標記23經過對齊感測器以且 感測器25偵測到標記時,一對齊訊號送到動作控制器。 回應時,控制器在時間τ 1開始一第一時間間隔TINT1,第 時間間隔TINT 1係用以指示一第二時間間隔tint2的開始 。當第一時間間隔TINT1在時間T2終止時,開始第二時間 間隔TINT2,一第二對齊訊號R 2係在第—時間間隔TINT2期 458924 A7 ---- ·_···ι 一__________ B7____ 五、發明說明(71 ) 間由控制器所接收,指示該機1 0及密封總成4 8、5 0具有正 常作業。 备在第一時間間隔期間並未接收後續的對齊訊號,則在 第一時間間隔終點處開始另一第二時間間隔,且控制器暸 解機器異常運作。若第二時間間隔中接收到多重對齊訊號 ’機器亦異常運作。異常的機器運作係造成—錯誤偵測訊 號送到控制器’導致程序停止、發出警示、對操作者顯示 適當訊息、或有其他適當作用。對於所彳貞測的各對齊標記 係重覆產生第一及第二時間間隔。 第一時間間隔係計算爲一第一預定時間(爲循環時間除以 軌道上的滑架數),若採用六個滑架,第一時間間隔係爲除 以六之循環時間,應在第二時間間隔的中點處產生對齊標 記之偵測,第二時間間隔計算爲一第二預定時間(爲第一時 間間隔的兩倍),或除以一軌道上的滑架數量之循環時間乘 以二。若採用六個滑架,第二時間間隔爲循環時間除以三 。藉由這些特徵,系統可偵測一已知時間中之一遺失的對 齊訊號或多個對齊訊號。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 對齊訊號亦用以檢查及修改滑架相對於一位置輪廓之位 置,因此,兩個次總成的密封爪對齊及其與移動的管2 〇移 入接合(見圖1)以形成橫向密封之正時,亦爲债測在移動的 織物12上出現或不出現對齊標記23之一函數,藉由此裝置 ,並未刻意修改管20經過熱密封站40之往前移動速度,而 是,修改相對齊的密封爪或滑架定位以容纳往前移動管2 〇 之速度。因此,若因管中拉力變化或因FFS機之一或多機械 -74- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458 924 A7 ---------B7___ 五、發明說明(72 ) 元件未精確運作而改變移動的管20之速度,本系統係偵測 此管速度變異、並調整相對齊密封爪之位置,以確使密封 爪在爲偵測一對齊標記的一函數之時間與管相接合。視需 要,密封爪與管的接合位置不需直接位於管上的一對齊標 記,而可移動與對齊標記相距之一設定距離。由於本系統 對於密封爪位置之彈性係爲偵測對齊標記及其他項目之函 數,本發明可用以產生任何各種包裝尺寸,而系統不需作 機械改變。 再參照圖18A及18B,第一循環中,一旦接收對齊訊號ri 之後’控制器採用對應於具有觸發該對齊訊號r 1之對齊標 記的包裝之滑架的實際位置,相對於輪廓來檢查滑架的實 際位置P1。因爲在T1時實際位置P1等於對齊位置,實際 位置P 1係位於位置目標上,且滑架移動不需要墙正β 第二循壤中’對齊訊號R2發生於Τ2,滑架實際位置位於 並非位置目標之Ρ2 ’而比Τ3的目標時間更早,.因此需要矯 正,藉由表往左偏向等於接收對齊訊號時的時間目標Τ3與 實際時間Τ2間之差異量(如箭頭L所示),而產生矯正。鱗 正之後’重新界定目標時間’譬如,控制器對於此滑架的 驅動裝置D係傳送需使滑架必須在Τ2-Τ3時間内由位置Ρ2 移到位置Ρ3之一訊號,如圖示,墙正需在時間Τ3之前使滑 架移至位置Ρ 3。 預先計算的滑架位置輪廓係對應於代表滑架速度與時間 之間關係之一速度輪廓,鱗正期間,滑架的實際速度將略 偏離預定的速度輪廓,以使滑架與偏移的表成爲同步。 -75- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----------1--------訂---------線- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再I窵本頁) 、 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 ^ 8 9 2 4 A7 -------------- 五、發明說明(73 ) 當產生第三對齊訊號R3時,假設並未干擾到第三循環中 之滑架運作,實際位置P4係精確配合位置目標。 第四循環中’對齊訊號R4發生於時間T5,滑架的實際位 置並非位置目標之位置P5,因此需要矯正。藉由將表往右 偏向(如箭頭R所示)而產生矯正。矯正之後’重新界定目標 時間’譬如,控制器對於此滑架的驅動器係傳送需在時間 T6則產生的一訊號(滑架處於ρ6)。矯正期間,滑架的實際 速度再度略微偏離預定速度輪廓,以使滑架與偏移的表進 入同步化,係對於送到控制器之各對齊訊號產生監測及矯 正。 矯正可發生在產生對齊訊號之相同循環中,矯正可直接 發生於偵測到訊號之後,或者矯正可延後至循環中之—較 晚時間(譬如對於表偏移具有最小干擾時),亦可省略矯正 或完全延至另一循環,若超過一預定矯正最大限度,矯正 可分佈在數個循環,矯正最大限度可使系統平順地運作。 可標示矯正期間產生的包裝而加以剔除,雖然顯示一滑架 之位置輪廓,視需要對於後續滑架連續施加矯正。 ,木 系統設計成使得對齊訊號的產生較佳盡量接近位置及 間目標以盡量減少矯正’由於自各滑架位置感測器至 控制器之高精相饋,系㈣以可接受精確度運行 環,正常環境下,所施的最大矯正係小於數公厘。矯正、 佳小於約1公厘、矯正更佳小於0 2公厘、矯正最佳正= 0.1公厘。矯正可包含加速、減速、或使相關的滑架保= -76- 本紙張尺度適用中_家標準(CNS)A4規格C 297公17 11 I------tri — — — f請先閱讀背面之ί£意事項再¾..貧本K)Μ.tr --------- line I a Consumption Cooperation of Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed 458924 V. Description of the invention (70) A function of an alignment mark 23 may or may not appear, as shown in Figure i As shown. Therefore, the signal from an alignment mark detector 2S is also fed to the controller for analysis with a pair of relatively aligned seal jaws. The electrical energy supplied to the coils of the aligned seal jaws is modified to ensure that the seal jaws are engaged with an alignment mark on the tube. With this device, the speed of forward movement of the tube past the heat-seal station 28 is not intentionally modified, but rather the relative positioning of the sealing claws to accommodate any speed of the forward-moving tube. Therefore, if the speed of a moving tube is changed due to changes in the pulling force in the tube or because one or more mechanical elements of the FFS machine are not operating accurately, the system detects the variation in the speed of the tube and adjusts the position of the relatively uniform sealing claws. Make the sealing claws engage with the tube at a time that detects a function of an alignment mark. »As needed, the joint position of the sealing claws with the tube need not be an alignment mark directly on the tube, but can be moved away from an alignment mark. A set distance. Since the elasticity of the system to the position of the seal claw is a function of detecting an alignment mark and other items, the present invention can be used to produce any of a variety of package sizes without the system having to change mechanically. Figures 18Λ and 18B show an example of a preferred device for aligning the sealing jaws. As shown, a preferred embodiment of the present invention uses the alignment mark 23 and the sensor 25, and a programmable window or time interval To monitor the movement of the carriage, as shown in Figures 18A and 18B. When an alignment mark 23 passes the alignment sensor and the sensor 25 detects the mark, an alignment signal is sent to the motion controller. In response, the controller starts a first time interval TINT1 at time τ 1, and the second time interval TINT 1 is used to indicate the start of a second time interval tint2. When the first time interval TINT1 expires at time T2, the second time interval TINT2 is started, and a second alignment signal R 2 is in the first time interval TINT2 period 458924 A7 ---- · _ ··· ι __________ B7____ Fifth, the description of the invention (71) is received by the controller, indicating that the machine 10 and the sealing assembly 48, 50 have normal operations. If the device does not receive subsequent alignment signals during the first time interval, it starts another second time interval at the end of the first time interval, and the controller understands that the machine is operating abnormally. If a multiple alignment signal is received in the second time interval, the machine also operates abnormally. Abnormal machine operation is caused by an error detection signal sent to the controller 'causing the program to stop, issue a warning, display the appropriate message to the operator, or have other appropriate effects. The first and second time intervals are repeatedly generated for each alignment mark detected. The first time interval is calculated as a first predetermined time (which is the cycle time divided by the number of carriages on the track). If six carriages are used, the first time interval is the cycle time divided by six, which should be the second Detection of alignment marks is generated at the midpoint of the time interval. The second time interval is calculated as a second predetermined time (twice the first time interval), or the cycle time divided by the number of carriages on a track multiplied by two. If six carriages are used, the second time interval is the cycle time divided by three. With these features, the system can detect a missing alignment signal or multiple alignment signals at a known time. The alignment signal printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is also used to check and modify the position of the carriage relative to the contour of a position. Therefore, the seal claws of the two sub-assemblies are aligned and moved into engagement with the moving tube 2 ( (See Figure 1) To form the timing of the transverse seal, it is also a function of the presence or absence of the alignment mark 23 on the moving fabric 12 as a result of the debt measurement. With this device, the tube 20 is not intentionally modified to pass through the heat sealing station 40. Moving forward, instead, modify the alignment of the sealing claws or carriage to accommodate the speed of moving the tube 20 forward. Therefore, if the tension in the tube changes or because of one or more of the FFS machines -74- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458 924 A7 --------- B7___ V. Description of the Invention (72) The component does not operate accurately and changes the speed of the moving tube 20. This system detects the speed variation of this tube and adjusts the position of the relatively uniform sealing claws. To ensure that the sealing claw engages the tube at a time as a function of detecting an alignment mark. If necessary, the joint position of the sealing claw and the tube does not need to be an alignment mark directly on the tube, but can be moved one set distance from the alignment mark. Since the elasticity of the system with respect to the position of the seal claw is a function of detecting alignment marks and other items, the present invention can be used to produce any of a variety of package sizes without the system having to make mechanical changes. Referring again to FIGS. 18A and 18B, in the first cycle, once the alignment signal ri is received, the controller uses the actual position of the carriage corresponding to the package with the alignment mark that triggers the alignment signal r 1 to check the carriage relative to the contour. The actual position P1. Because the actual position P1 is equal to the aligned position at T1, the actual position P1 is located on the position target, and the carriage does not need to be wall positive β In the second cycle, the alignment signal R2 occurs at T2, and the actual position of the carriage is not at the position The target P2 'is earlier than the target time of T3. Therefore, correction is needed. The leftward deviation of the table is equal to the difference between the time target T3 and the actual time T2 when the alignment signal is received (as shown by arrow L), and Produce corrections. 'Redefine target time' after scale is correct. For example, the controller must transmit the signal from the position P2 to the position P3 within the time of T2-T3. For example, the wall It is necessary to move the carriage to the position P 3 before time T3. The pre-calculated profile of the carriage position corresponds to one of the speed profiles representing the relationship between the speed and time of the carriage. During the scale period, the actual speed of the carriage will slightly deviate from the predetermined speed profile, so that the table of the carriage and offset Become synchronized. -75- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- 1 -------- Order ------- --Line- (Please read the precautions on the back before I 窎 this page), printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 ^ 8 9 2 4 A7 -------------- V. Description of the invention (73) When the third alignment signal R3 is generated, assuming that the operation of the carriage in the third cycle is not disturbed, the actual position P4 is precisely matched with the position target. In the fourth cycle, the 'alignment signal R4 occurs at time T5. The actual position of the carriage is not the position target position P5, so it needs to be corrected. Correction is produced by tilting the watch to the right (shown by arrow R). After the correction, the target time is redefined. For example, the controller transmits a signal to the driver of the carriage at time T6 (the carriage is at ρ6). During the correction, the actual speed of the carriage deviates slightly from the predetermined speed profile again, so that the carriage and the offset table are synchronized, and the alignment signals sent to the controller are monitored and corrected. Correction can occur in the same cycle that generates the alignment signal, correction can occur directly after the signal is detected, or correction can be postponed to the cycle—at a later time (for example, when there is minimal interference with table offset), or Omitting the correction or completely delaying it to another cycle. If a predetermined correction maximum is exceeded, the correction can be distributed in several cycles, and the correction maximum can make the system operate smoothly. The packaging produced during the correction can be marked and removed. Although the outline of the position of a carriage is displayed, correction is continuously applied to subsequent carriages as needed. The wood system is designed so that the alignment signal is generated as close as possible to the position and the target to minimize corrections. Because of the high-precision feedback from the carriage position sensors to the controller, the system is operated with acceptable accuracy Under normal circumstances, the maximum correction applied is less than a few millimeters. Correction, preferably less than about 1 mm, better correction is less than 0.2 mm, best correction = 0.1 mm. Correction can include acceleration, deceleration, or the relevant carriage protection = -76- This paper size is applicable _ Home Standard (CNS) A4 Specification C 297 Male 17 11 I ------ tri — — — f Please first Read the meanings on the back and then ¾ .. poor capital K)

-線I J. ,y 924 五、發明說明(74 ) 輪廓表、表偏移、及可程式化的視窗係爲用以使動作控 制器運作之軟體的特徵’具有以上特徵之推薦套裝軟體係 講自三洋謙吉(Sanyo Kenki)所屬分公司之美國喬治亞州的 亞特蘭大之自㈣m (Aut〇maticm Intelligenee)之“先進 動作語言,,。包括以上特徵之其他推薦軟體蹲自瑞思洛兹 (Rexroth)的曼司門(Mannesman)部門之英地門特咖財) /見覺動作’’。另一推薦的套裝軟體購自動作工程公司的 “ C ”的資料或亞倫布來力的“圖形動作語言,,。 如上述,當各對相對密封爪7〇、71對管2〇關閉時,可控 制各對密封爪與工件適當預定部份之逋當對齊,工件的^ 定部份較佳決定爲沿管20之一位置、且包括管的相對侧。、 另一實施例中,工件的此部份包括工件可彼此相隔的兩個 或更多k置,但較佳更接近相配合呈操作性相關的滑架對 之工具。 另較佳實施例中,兩個次總成的密封爪7 Q、7 1之對齊 、及其移入接合移動管2〇以形成一橫向密封之正時係爲偵 測移動的織物上的對齊標記23之一函數’來自一工件部感 测器(譬如對齊標記偵測器2 5 )之一訊號係供應至控制器326 且進行分析。 較佳並未改變織物速度.,而是控制對齊的密封爪之定位 ’以確使下一對密封爪即將在預定位置處接合與適當部份 疋工件對齊部。較佳實施例中,若移動的管20速度改變(譬 如因爲管中的拉力變化、或因爲FFS機的一或多機械元件之 不.精確運作),本系統係偵測到管速度之此變異及標記23位 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再緣窩本頁) -表--------訂---------線 .7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -77- 巧張尺度適" X 297公釐) ^ 458 9 24 A7 _ _ 一 ·· — B7 -------- 五、發明說明(75 ) 置,並調整相對齊的密封爪70、71位置及速度,以確使密 封爪在偵測一對齊標記23的一函數之時間與管2〇相接合。 由於較佳實施例包括轉合對之滑架,控制器326可控制其僅 根據次總成工作進行侧上的滑架位置之移動,且使次總成 的回行側上的滑架進入次總成頂部。在密封爪與管2 〇接合 之前,可進行較佳實施例之對齊。 视需要,密封爪與管之接合位置不需直接位於管2〇上之 一對齊標記23上,而可自一對齊標記移動一預定距離,由 於本系統具有摘測一對齊標記及其他之一函數來定位密封 爪的彈性,本系統可用以產生任何各種包裝尺寸,而系統 不需作機械改變。 當密封爪與織物以操作性相關接合時,密封爪係在第一 及第二次總成之間的一工件方向中以一工件速度相配合握 持並拉取工件,第一及第二對的滑架係以第一及第二速度 沿次總成驅動,且可改變滑架與織物接合的速度以控制織 物速度,根據本發明之較佳實施例中,改變第一及第二速 度以使工件速度大致維持固定。 如上述,亦可根據工件相對次總成及工件速度上之部份 的偵測位置,由控制器改變相對彼此之第一及第二速度, 使工具與工件的各部份相對齊,較佳對於連續滑架及所操 作工件部份來重覆此作用。可改變沿相接合成對的工具及 滑架(或具有待接合工具的滑架)之電路的絕對速度,以一 不同速度來拉取織物,改變與相鄰接合滑架之間隔,或者 可能改變兩速度。此方法係克服織物上的標記間隔之誤差 -78- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再1离本頁) -------訂-----!—線—-Line I J., y 924 V. Description of the invention (74) The contour table, table offset, and programmable window are features of the software used to make the motion controller operate. 'Recommended package software system with the above characteristics Speaking from Sanyo Kenki's subsidiary, Atlanta, Georgia, USA, "Automaticm Intelligenee", "Advanced Motion Language." Other recommended software including the above features is from Rexroth. Mannesman's Department of Indy Mentecai) / seeing action ". Another recommended software package is purchased automatically as the" C "information of the engineering company or Aaron Brealy's" graphic action " Language, As mentioned above, when each pair of relative sealing claws 70 and 71 pairs of tubes 20 are closed, it is possible to control the proper alignment of each pair of sealing claws with a suitable predetermined portion of the workpiece. One position and includes the opposite side of the tube. In another embodiment, this part of the workpiece includes two or more k pieces of workpieces that can be spaced apart from each other, but preferably closer to the tool of the carriage pair that cooperates with each other for operability. In another preferred embodiment, the alignment of the sealing claws 7 Q, 71 of the two sub-assemblies, and their movement into the joint moving tube 20 to form a transverse seal timing is to detect the alignment marks on the moving fabric A function 23 is a signal from a workpiece sensor (such as the alignment mark detector 25), which is supplied to the controller 326 and analyzed. It is preferable not to change the fabric speed, but to control the positioning of the aligned sealing claws to ensure that the next pair of sealing claws will soon be engaged at a predetermined position with an appropriate portion 疋 the workpiece alignment portion. In a preferred embodiment, if the speed of the moving tube 20 changes (for example because of a change in the pulling force in the tube, or because of the precise operation of one or more mechanical elements of the FFS machine), the system detects this variation in the tube speed And 23 marks (please read the precautions on the back first and then go to this page)-Table -------- Order --------- Line. 7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -77- The size of the sheet is suitable (quote X 297 mm) ^ 458 9 24 A7 _ _ One · · — B7 -------- 5. Description of the invention (75) and adjust the relatively uniform seal Positions and speeds of the claws 70, 71 to ensure that the sealing claws engage the tube 20 at a time as a function of detecting an alignment mark 23. Since the preferred embodiment includes the carriage of the turn-on pair, the controller 326 can control the movement of the carriage position on the side only according to the work of the sub-assembly, and make the carriage on the return side of the sub-assembly enter the sub-assembly. Assembly top. Prior to engagement of the sealing jaws with the tube 20, alignment of the preferred embodiment may be performed. If necessary, the joint position of the sealing claw and the tube does not need to be directly on one of the alignment marks 23 on the tube 20, but can be moved a predetermined distance from an alignment mark. Since the system has a function of extracting an alignment mark and other functions To locate the elasticity of the sealing jaws, the system can be used to produce any of a variety of packaging sizes without requiring mechanical changes to the system. When the sealing claw and the fabric are operatively related, the sealing claw is held in a workpiece direction between the first and second assemblies at a workpiece speed to hold and pull the workpiece. The first and second pairs The carriage is driven along the sub-assembly at first and second speeds, and the speed at which the carriage engages the fabric can be changed to control the fabric speed. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the first and second speeds are changed to Keep the workpiece speed approximately constant. As described above, the controller may also change the first and second speeds relative to each other according to the detection position of the workpiece relative to the subassembly and the workpiece speed, so that the tool and each part of the workpiece are relatively aligned. Repeat this action for the continuous carriage and the part of the workpiece being operated. Can change the absolute speed of the circuit along the tool and carriage (or carriage with the tool to be joined) that are paired together, pull the fabric at a different speed, change the distance from the adjacent joining carriage, or possibly change Two speeds. This method overcomes the error of the mark interval on the fabric. -78- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before leaving the page) --- ---- Order -----! -line-

• V• V

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印MEmployees' Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, India M

五、發明說明(76 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 及變異,尤其在織物编接至另一段織物時,亦可使標記彼V. Description of the invention (76) Printed and mutated by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, especially when the fabric is spliced to another piece of fabric

此有不同間隔,且在各連續標記、或待接合及操作之部份 織物上與工具相對齊及接合D 如圖示,上述圖1之包裝機可用以製造任何各種包裝尺寸 ,且系統不作機械修改。 現描述管之密封方法’爲了進行管之横向密封,第—次 總成48的一密封爪70係與第二次總成5〇之一密封爪71相 對齊,第二次總成5 0係如圖1所示安裝在位於工件i j或移 動織物1 2的相對侧之一滑架上’且提供一密封能量。管2 〇 配置在密封爪70、71之間一段足以進行所需橫向密封的有 限時間’當相對滑架52、53沿路徑99往前移動在一工件方 向13中經過密封站28之一工作區32時,密封爪70及71移 向彼此且移動而與管20相接合。較佳藉由上述感應產生密 封’但可採用任何其他適當密封方法,在部份時間中,兩 個密封爪70、71彼此保持對齊、並随管20移動通過工作區 32,而較佳以往前移度的管20速度相同的速度來拉取管2〇 。此時間間隔中,織物1 2持續往兪移動通過FFS機1 〇及密 封站28,且第一及第二密封次總成48、50的密封爪70、 71相對齊並先移動接合一部份工件11或充填的管2〇之相對 侧,故對於管20呈施壓關係。當能量施於管20困在密封爪 之間的部份時,係維持密封爪70、71施於充填管20之壓力 ,使得織物1 2的鋁層受到充能JL園繞鋁層之熱塑層已加熱 至其熔點。較佳在此能量移去之後,仍施壓另一時間,使 得該區冷卻至其固化溫度且因此形成一密封46。之後,管 -79- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注$項再痕貧本頁) ^^ -------訂----I---*線— 1 Ί 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 * 458924 A7 ' --------— B7 _ 五、發明說明(77 ) 較佳在^封區46切斷產生分離的包裝部34,如圖1所示 疋後,您封爪70、71移動離開及脱離與管2〇之接合。 較佳,&輪從動件係與凸輪轨道呈固定接觸,可採用各 種裝置(譬如壓縮彈簧、彈簧轴、慣性鎖或適合在凸輪從動 件與凸輪軌道之間維持接觸之任何其他裝置)。 本發明及其使用-線性馬達作爲驅動系統係可具有前所 未見<處理速度,尤其可利用系統來獲得最高達約至少每 小時24,000至48,000包裝之處理速度,線性馬達的尺寸可與 處理速度呈互相關聯。 ' 雖以特定名稱描述本發明,瞭解可採用各種相等的實施 例’譬如,可安裝本發明之可移式構件而由可移式構件與 軌道之間相連沿軌道移動,或者可移式構件可相對軌道呈 磁性懸置。並且,本文描述滑架的數個實施例,由於本發 明不限於任何所揭示的滑架實施例,亦可採用其他滑架類 型。 熟悉本技藝者暸解:可作本發明精神與範園内之變化及 修改,因此,所有熟悉本技藝者可由上述揭示作出本發明 精神與範圍内之權宜修改且包括在本發明其他實施例之中 ,因此,在申請專利範圍中界定本發明範園。 -80- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) --------訂----- (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再¾.贫本頁) ,.v- i I n -線j----------------------There are different intervals, and they are aligned with the tools on each continuous mark, or part of the fabric to be joined and operated. As shown in the figure, the packaging machine of Figure 1 above can be used to make any of various packaging sizes, and the system is not mechanical. modify. The method of sealing the tube will now be described. In order to perform lateral sealing of the tube, a sealing claw 70 of the first assembly 48 is aligned with one of the sealing claw 71 of the second assembly 50, and a second assembly 50 As shown in FIG. 1, it is mounted on a carriage located on the opposite side of the workpiece ij or the moving fabric 12 ′ and provides a sealing energy. The tube 20 is arranged between the sealing jaws 70, 71 for a limited time sufficient to perform the required lateral sealing. 'When the relative carriages 52, 53 are moved forward along the path 99, they pass through one of the sealing stations 28 in the direction of a workpiece 13 At 2300 hours, the sealing claws 70 and 71 move toward each other and move to engage the tube 20. The seal is preferably generated by the above induction, but any other suitable sealing method may be used. In some times, the two sealing claws 70, 71 remain aligned with each other and move with the tube 20 through the work area 32. Pipe the tube 20 at the same speed as the tube 20 at the same speed. During this time interval, the fabric 12 continues to move through the FFS machine 10 and the sealing station 28, and the sealing claws 70 and 71 of the first and second sealing sub-assemblies 48 and 50 are relatively aligned and first move to join a part The opposite side of the workpiece 11 or the filled tube 20 is in a pressure relation to the tube 20. When energy is applied to the part of the tube 20 trapped between the sealing claws, the pressure applied by the sealing claws 70 and 71 to the filling tube 20 is maintained, so that the aluminum layer of the fabric 12 is subjected to the thermal plasticity of the energized JL round aluminum layer. The layer has been heated to its melting point. Preferably, after this energy is removed, pressure is still applied for another period of time to cool the zone to its curing temperature and thus form a seal 46. After that, tube-79- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please read the note on the back of the page before marking this page) ^^ ------- Order ---- I --- * line — 1 印 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs * 458924 A7 '--------— B7 _ V. Description of the invention (77) It is better The area 46 is cut off to produce the separated packaging portion 34. As shown in FIG. 1, after the seal claws 70, 71 are moved away from and disengaged from the engagement with the tube 20. Preferably, the & wheel follower is in fixed contact with the cam track, and various devices can be used (such as a compression spring, spring shaft, inertia lock, or any other device suitable for maintaining contact between the cam follower and the cam track) . The present invention and its use-a linear motor as a drive system can have an unprecedented processing speed, and in particular, the system can be used to obtain processing speeds of up to at least about 24,000 to 48,000 packaging per hour. Speed is interconnected. 'Although the present invention is described under a specific name, it is understood that various equivalent embodiments can be used.' For example, the movable member of the present invention can be installed and connected by the movable member and the track to move along the track, or the movable member can be The opposite track is magnetically suspended. Moreover, several embodiments of the carriage are described herein, since the present invention is not limited to any of the disclosed embodiments of the carriage, other types of carriages may be used. Those skilled in the art understand that changes and modifications in the spirit and scope of the present invention can be made. Therefore, all those skilled in the art can make expedient modifications within the spirit and scope of the present invention from the above disclosure and are included in other embodiments of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is defined in the scope of patent application. -80- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -------- Order ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before reading ¾. Page), .v- i I n -line j ----------------------

Claims (1)

.ml) 9 .2 4 A8 B8 C8 D8六、申請專利範圍 2. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 一種包裝機包含: 一第一軌道; 至少一第一滑架,其安裝相對於該第一軌道作獨立移 動,各第一滑架包括一反應性元件且具有相關之至少一 動作參數; 與該第一軌道相關之多數主動元件,該等主動元件與 該等滑架的反應性元件呈操作性相關,以在至少一第一 滑架與該第一軌道之間產生相對移動,各主動元件係獨 立啓動以控制此相對移動; 一控制系統,用以控制該等主動元件的啓動,以提供 各第一滑架之至少一動作參數之獨立控制;及 該(等)第一滑架相關之至少一第一工具,用以進行至 少部份之一製造作業; 其中係由該控制系統選擇性啓動該等主動元件,以沿 該第一軌道引導該(等)第一滑架,以進行至少部份的製 造作業。 如申請專利範圍第1項之包裝機,進—步包含: 一第二執道,設置鄰近該第一軌道; 至少一第二滑架,其安裝相對於該第二軌遒作獨立移 動’各第二滑架包括一反應性元件JL具有相關之至少— 動作參數; 與該第二軌道相關之多數主動元件,該等主動元件與 該等滑架的反應性元件呈操作性相關,以分別在該等第 一及第二滑架與該等第一及第二軌道之間產生相對移動 • 81 - 私紙張尺度適用中_家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 Χ 297公愛) (請先間讀背面之浓意事項再填寫本頁) n I H 一5', · n n n II ϋ ϋ I I \ny^ ϋ n ί ϋ ί I 1 A8 B8 C8 D8 458 9 24 六、申請專利範圍 ,各主動元件係獨立啓動以控制此相對移動;及 至少一第一工具’與該(等)第二滑架相關以進行至少 部份的製造作業, 其中該控制系統係控制.該等主動元件的啓動,以提供 各第一及第二滑架之至少一動作參數之獨立控制;及由 該控制系統來選擇性啓動該等主動元件,以沿且各別軌 道引導該等第一及第二滑架’該等第一及第二滑架係在 該等軌道的一第一段處(此處進行至少部份製造作業)合 併’且在該等第一及第二軌道的其他段處相分離。 4 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 6 7 如申請專利範園第2項之包裝機,其中該等主動元件係 爲與鄰近線圈呈電絕緣且沿該等第一及第二路徑配置之 導電線圈,各該等線圈在啓動時係建立該等反應性元件 與電磁場相關時可有效影響反應性元件之一電磁場。 如申請專利範園第3項之包裝機,其中該控制系統係以 各弟一及第二滑架沿第一及第二軌道的位置之一函數, 來控制各該等線圈的啓動,故可獨立控制各第—及第二 滑架》 如申請專利範園第3項之包裝機,其中該控制系統係控 制第一及第二滑架的速度,使得材料織物具有大致固定 的速度。 如申請專利範園第2項之包裝機,其中至少一動作參數 爲下列各物中之一或多者:力量、加速度、速度、方向 、位置、扭矩、或顚簸。 如申請專利範園第2項之包裝機,其中該等主動元件係 -82- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4 58 9 24六、申請專利範圍 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 安裝在該等執道上,且該控制系統包括一多工器。 8·如申請專利範固第2項之包裝機,其中利用包裝機自— 材料織物來形成物件,JL該等第一及第二工具的構造可 相配合而在該等第一及第二軌道之間握持並拉取該織物。 9.如申請專利範園第8項之包裝機,其中該等物件爲充填 有一食物之包裝,且該等第一及第二工具係共同包含— 密封機構以密封及切開已充填的包裝。 1 〇 如申請專利範圍第9項之包裝機,其中該控制系統的構 造係改變該等第一及第二滑架沿該等第一及第二軌道獨 立移動之速度或速率,以使該織物經過包裝機維持一概 呈固定速度。 1 1.如申請專利範圍第2項之包裝機,其中該控制系統的構 造在該等第一及第二工具係移動而接合該材料織物且時 ,係減緩該等第一及第二滑架沿該等第一及第二軌道之 移動,且在該移動完成接合該織物時使該等滑架加速移 動。 12_如申請專利範圍第1項之包裝機,進一步包含一物件位 置感測器,其構造及位置可偵測該物件的位置;且其中 該控制系統係與該物件位置感測器及該等第一及第二滑 架呈操作性相關,以改變該等滑架沿該等軌道的移動速 率,使得各第一及第二工具與該物件的各部份在接合期 間相對齊。 13.如申請專利範園第2項之包裝機,其中該第一轨道位置 係靠近該第二軌道,使得該等第一及第二滑架可在該等 -83- ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ~\誇先閱讀背面之;i.t事項再填窝本頁) -ϋ I - I I - H 一SJ I - - --. 1 n I I n ^1 - I n - - I n - - I ϋ n I - I 酵 1..ml) 9 .2 4 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Scope of patent application 2. The consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints a packaging machine containing: a first track; at least one first carriage, which is installed relative to the The first track moves independently, and each first carriage includes a reactive element and has at least one associated motion parameter; most active elements related to the first track, the active elements and reactive elements of the carriages It is operatively related to generate relative movement between at least one first carriage and the first track, and each active element is independently activated to control the relative movement; a control system is used to control the activation of the active elements, To provide independent control of at least one motion parameter of each first carriage; and at least one first tool related to the first carriage (for) to perform at least part of a manufacturing operation; which is controlled by the control system The active components are selectively activated to guide the (or) first carriage along the first track for at least part of a manufacturing operation. If the packaging machine for the scope of patent application No. 1 is applied, the further steps include: a second road, set adjacent to the first track; at least a second carriage, which is installed to move independently relative to the second track; The second carriage includes a reactive element JL that has at least associated action parameters; most of the active elements associated with the second track, and the active elements are operatively related to the reactive elements of the carriages, respectively, in Relative movement between the first and second carriages and the first and second rails • 81-Private paper size applicable _ Home Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) (Please first Read the connotation on the back and fill in this page) n IH 1 5 ', · nnn II ϋ ϋ II \ ny ^ ϋ n ί ϋ I 1 A8 B8 C8 D8 458 9 24 6. Scope of patent application, each active component system Independent activation to control this relative movement; and at least one first tool 'associated with the (or other) second carriage to perform at least part of the manufacturing operation, wherein the control system is controlled. The activation of the active elements to provide At least one of each of the first and second carriages Independent control of motion parameters; and the control system to selectively activate the active elements to guide the first and second carriages along and respective tracks' the first and second carriages are attached to the A track is merged at a first section (where at least part of the manufacturing operation is performed) and separated at other sections of the first and second tracks. 4 Consumption cooperation by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 6 7 For example, the packaging machine of the patent application Fanyuan No. 2, where the active components are electrically insulated from adjacent coils and are arranged along the first and second paths. Conductive coils, each of these coils is an electromagnetic field that can effectively affect the reactive elements when the reactive elements are related to the electromagnetic field during startup. For example, for the packaging machine of the patent application No. 3, the control system is a function of the position of each of the first and second carriages along the first and second tracks to control the activation of each of these coils. Independently control each of the first and second carriages "The packaging machine of item 3 of the patent application park, wherein the control system controls the speed of the first and second carriages so that the material fabric has a substantially fixed speed. For example, the packaging machine for the patent application No. 2 in which at least one action parameter is one or more of the following: force, acceleration, speed, direction, position, torque, or bump. For example, if you apply for the packaging machine of Fanyuan Item 2, the active components are -82- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 4 58 9 24 VI. Patent scope A8 B8 C8 D8 The Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed and installed on these roads, and the control system includes a multiplexer. 8 · If the packing machine of the patent application Fangu No. 2 uses the packing machine to form the material from the material fabric, the structure of the first and second tools of JL can be matched to the first and second tracks. Hold and pull the fabric between. 9. The packaging machine of item 8 of the patent application park, where the objects are filled with a food package, and the first and second tools are collectively included-a sealing mechanism to seal and cut the filled package. 10. The packaging machine according to item 9 of the scope of patent application, wherein the structure of the control system is to change the speed or speed of the first and second carriages independently moving along the first and second tracks so that the fabric Maintain a constant speed through the packaging machine. 1 1. The packaging machine according to item 2 of the patent application scope, wherein the structure of the control system is to slow down the first and second carriages when the first and second tools are moved to engage the material fabric and The movement along the first and second tracks, and the carriages are accelerated to move when the movement finishes engaging the fabric. 12_ If the packaging machine under the scope of patent application item 1 further includes an object position sensor, the structure and position of which can detect the position of the object; and wherein the control system is related to the object position sensor and such The first and second carriages are operatively related to change the speed of movement of the carriages along the tracks so that each of the first and second tools is aligned with parts of the object during engagement. 13. The packaging machine according to item 2 of the patent application park, wherein the position of the first track is close to the second track, so that the first and second carriages can be used in China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~ \ Quotation first read the back; it matters then fill in this page) -ϋ I-II-H -SJ I---. 1 n II n ^ 1 -I n--I n--I ϋ n I-I leave 1. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458924 頜 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 第一及第一軌道之間界定的區域中相遇,以.相配合進行 至少部份之製造作業。 14,如申請專利範園第3項之包裝機,其中該等主動元件及 反應性元件係爲一線性馬達之部份,且該線性馬達係沿 該等軌道驅動該等第一及第二滑架。 如申請專利範圍第8項之包裝機,其中該等第一及第二 滑架進一步包含與其相關之一第三工具,用以控制該物 件容積之該第三工具’且該等第一及第二工具係相配合 密封及切開該包裝機形成之該等物件。 I6. —種用以包裝物品之方法,包含: 安裝多數第一滑架,以相對具一第一移動路徑之一第 一軌道作獨立移動,該等第一滑架已與至少—反應性元 件及至少一動作參數相關; 使多數主動元件與該第一軌道上之一或多個第一滑架 的至少一反應性元件呈操作性相關,以產生該第—滑架 與該第一軌道之間的相對移動,各主動元件係獨立啓動 以控制此相對移動; 使至少一第一工具與各第一滑架相關,以進行至少部 份的一製造作業; 沿該第一移動路徑相整合之一第三路徑來定位—材料 織物;及 控制孩等王動元件之啓動,以沿該第一軌道引導該( 等)第一滑架,故可利用該第一工具沿該第三路徑在該 材料織物上至少部份進行該製造作 μ ---------------1'--------訂---------線!ο-------------------- 〈請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁} -84- A8 B8 C8 D8 ^58924 六、申請專利範圍 17. 如申請專利範園第16項之方法,進一步包含: 安裝多數第二滑架,以相對具一第二移動路徑之一第 二軌道作獨立移動,該等第二滑架已與至少一反應性元 件及至少一動作參數相關; 使多數主動元件與該(等)第二滑架的至少一反應性元 件呈操作性相關,以產生該第二滑架與該等第二軌遒之 間的相對移動,各主動元件係獨立啓動以控制此相對移 動; 使至少一第·--工具與各第二滑架相關,以進行至少部 份的一製造作業;及 控制該主動元件之啓動,以沿各軌道引導該等第_及 第一滑架’故利用該等第一及第二工具在該材料織物上 至少部份進行該製造作業。 18. 如申請專利範園第17項之方法,其中該動作參數爲下列 各物之一或多項:力量、方向、速度、加速度、位置、 扭矩、或顚凝:。 19. 如申請專利範圍第27項之方法,其進一步包含:當梦等 第一及第二工具相配合進行該製造作業時,使該等 及第二滑架沿該等第一及第二路徑呈聯合移動。 20. 如申請專利範園第17項之方法,其中該製造作業爲橫白 熱密封及切割一織物材料,以形成一物件。 ° 2 1 ·如申請專利範圍第1 7項之方法,其中該製造作業包括 第一工具的密封器來密封一部份該材料織物, 义 A主少部 份形成一物件。 85 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) ^請先聞讀背面之注专爹項再填窝本頁} 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 -I I I I J I I» — — — — — — — — — JIIIIIIJIIIIIII1II — — — — — I. ;y -4 0^00 00 09 ABCD 六、申請專利範圍 22,如申請專利範園第17項之方法,其中該製造作業包括以 該等第一及第二工具在該等第—及第二滑架之間以一橄 呈固定速度來握持並拉取該材料織物。 23·如申請專利範園第17項之方法,進一步包含:债測一部 份材料織物相對於第一及第二滑架的一位置之位置,及 定位該等第一及第二滑架,以與該材料織物上的一對齊 標記相對準,以產生概呈平均尺寸之物件。 24·如申請專利範園第17項之方法,其中沿各別軌道引導該 等苐一及第二滑架係包括:將該等滑架相對彼此獨立驅 動至一位置,其中該等第一及第二工具係使該材料織物 的各部份呈操作性相關,且位置彼此鄰近以相配合進行 製造物件之製造作業。 (猜先閱讀背面之涞意事^庳填窝本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _ 86 - 本紙張尺度適用尹國國家標準(CNS&gt;A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) —J n I m n I I _li 睡 Ϊ — — — · J 瞧 — I — — — — — — — — JmL—Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458924 Jaw C8 D8 VI. Scope of patent application Meet in the area defined between the first and the first track, and cooperate to carry out at least part of the manufacturing operations. 14. If the packaging machine of the patent application No. 3 is applied, the active and reactive components are part of a linear motor, and the linear motor drives the first and second slides along the tracks frame. For example, if the packaging machine is under the scope of patent application No. 8, wherein the first and second carriages further include a third tool associated with the third tool for controlling the volume of the object, and the first and second The two tools cooperate to seal and cut the objects formed by the packaging machine. I6. — A method for packing items, comprising: installing a plurality of first carriages to move independently relative to a first track having a first movement path, the first carriages having been connected with at least a reactive element Related to at least one action parameter; making most active elements operatively related to at least one reactive element of one or more first carriages on the first track to generate the first carriage and the first track. Between the relative movements, each active element is independently activated to control the relative movement; at least one first tool is associated with each first carriage to perform at least part of a manufacturing operation; and integrated along the first movement path A third path for positioning—the material fabric; and controlling the activation of the king ’s moving element to guide the (or) first carriage along the first track, so the first tool can be used along the third path in the The fabric is made at least partly on the fabric as μ --------------- 1 '-------- Order --------- Thread! ο -------------------- <Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page} -84- A8 B8 C8 D8 ^ 58924 6. Scope of Patent Application 17 The method of claim 16 of the patent application park further comprises: installing a plurality of second carriages to independently move relative to one of the second rails having a second movement path, and the second carriages have reacted with at least one The at least one active parameter is related to the at least one reactive element of the second carriage (such as the second carriage), so as to generate the relationship between the second carriage and the second rails. Relative movement, each active element is independently activated to control this relative movement; at least one first --- tool is associated with each second carriage to perform at least a part of a manufacturing operation; and controlling the activation of the active element to The first and second carriages are guided along each track, so the first and second tools are used to perform the manufacturing operation on the material fabric at least partially. 18. The method according to item 17 of the patent application park, wherein the action parameter is one or more of the following: force, direction, speed, acceleration, position, torque, or condensation: 19. If the method of claim 27 is applied, it further comprises: when the first and second tools such as dreams cooperate to perform the manufacturing operation, causing the and second carriages to follow the first and second paths Joint movement. 20. The method of claim 17 in the patent application park, wherein the manufacturing operation is to heat seal and cut a fabric material to form an object. ° 2 1 · The method according to item 17 of the scope of patent application, wherein the manufacturing operation includes a seal of the first tool to seal a part of the material fabric, and the main part and the small part form an object. 85 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm) ^ Please read the note on the back before filling in this page} Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives-IIIIJII »— — — — — — — — — — JIIIIIIJIIIIIII1II — — — — — I.; y -4 0 ^ 00 00 09 ABCD VI. Application for Patent Scope 22, such as the method of applying for Patent Park No. 17, where the manufacturing operation This includes holding and pulling the fabric with the first and second tools between the first and second carriages at a fixed speed. 23. The method according to item 17 of the patent application park, further comprising: measuring the position of a portion of the material fabric relative to the first and second carriages, and positioning the first and second carriages, Align with an alignment mark on the fabric of the material to produce objects of approximately average size. 24. The method according to item 17 of the patent application park, wherein guiding the first and second carriages along respective tracks comprises: driving the carriages independently to each other to a position, wherein the first and The second tool is to make the parts of the material fabric operationally related and located adjacent to each other to cooperate with each other to perform the manufacturing operation of the manufacturing object. (Guess read the 涞 意 事 on the back ^ 庳 fill in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _ 86-This paper size applies to the national standard of Yin State (CNS &gt; A4 specification (210 χ 297 mm) — J n I mn II _li Sleeping — — — · J 瞧 — I — — — — — — — — JmL—
TW89107846A 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Packaging machine TW458924B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13102799P 1999-04-26 1999-04-26
US13734699P 1999-06-03 1999-06-03
US14448399P 1999-07-17 1999-07-17
US18502000P 2000-02-25 2000-02-25
US18501900P 2000-02-25 2000-02-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW458924B true TW458924B (en) 2001-10-11

Family

ID=27537886

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89107844A TW458923B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Machine with independently movable tools
TW89107846A TW458924B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Packaging machine
TW89107852A TW458925B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Packaging machine
TW89107855A TW470724B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Multi-jaw transverse sealer
TW89107853A TW460400B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Induction sealing jaw

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89107844A TW458923B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Machine with independently movable tools

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89107852A TW458925B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Packaging machine
TW89107855A TW470724B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Multi-jaw transverse sealer
TW89107853A TW460400B (en) 1999-04-26 2000-07-25 Induction sealing jaw

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (5) TW458923B (en)

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW470724B (en) 2002-01-01
TW458923B (en) 2001-10-11
TW460400B (en) 2001-10-21
TW458925B (en) 2001-10-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2000064753A1 (en) Packaging machine
JP2598932B2 (en) Improved sealing method and apparatus for high capacity aseptic molding, filling and sealing machines
EP3093130B1 (en) System and method for manufacturing off-axis prepreg material
CA2974045C (en) Method for wrapping bands around objects and corresponding machines
EP1827802B1 (en) Sealing device for producing sealed packages of a pourable food product
US4103139A (en) Welding apparatus
KR20190031175A (en) Dual cam servo weld splicer
EP0890515A1 (en) Method and device for sealing a web, and for producing a packaging container
KR101807493B1 (en) A scribing apparatus and a method for maintaining press load thereof
TW458924B (en) Packaging machine
CN102686496B (en) Strip material dispensing device
US7047623B2 (en) Device for installing a linear motor line
EP2213577B1 (en) Heat-sealing device and method for packaging machines, and packaging machine comprising said device
US20230001708A1 (en) Label printer and system for marking a prolate object
CN114555376B (en) Device and system for arranging a marker around an oblong object
US20230015628A1 (en) Technique for marking a prolate object
CN211251854U (en) Positioning code spraying device for bill printing
RU2783609C1 (en) Method for marking an extended object
US11887755B2 (en) Device for conductor marking
JP2019051556A (en) Dual cam servo weld splicer
RU2793220C1 (en) Method for marking around an elongated object
MXPA02010328A (en) Machine for packaging material in a longitudinally and transversally sealed tube.
JP2005327963A (en) Specified length feeder for wire rod
CN220867068U (en) Aluminum foil sealing machine
US11865793B2 (en) Production of collapsible pouches